Mitsubishi Electric PUHZ-RP100YKA Service manual

SPLIT-TYPE, HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONERS
May 2009
No.OCH451
SERVICE MANUAL
R410A
Outdoor unit
[model name]
Note:
• This manual describes only
service data of the outdoor
units.
• RoHS compliant products
have <G> mark on the
spec name plate.
[Service Ref.]
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
CONTENTS
1 REFERENCE MANUAL ·································· 2
2 SAFETY PRECAUTION ·································· 2
3 FEATURES ······················································ 6
4 SPECIFICATIONS ··········································· 7
5 DATA······························································ 10
6 OUTLINES AND DIMENSIONS ···················· 16
7 WIRING DIAGRAM ······································· 20
8 WIRING SPECIFICATIONS··························· 25
9 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DIAGRAM ·············· 30
10 TROUBLESHOOTING ··································· 34
11 FUNCTION SETTING ···································· 94
12 MONITORING THE OPERATION DATA BY THE REMOTE CONTROLLER ···101
13 EASY MAINTENANCE FUNCTION ·············111
14 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE ···················· 116
PARTS CATALOG (OCB451)
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
1
REFERENCE MANUAL
1-1. INDOOR UNIT SERVICE MANUAL
Service
Manual No.
Model name
Service Ref.
PLA-RP35/50/60/71/100/125BA
PLA-RP71/125/140BA2
PLA-RP35/50/60/71/100/125BA#2.UK
PLA-RP71/125/140BA2.UK
PLA-RP100BA3
PLA-RP100BA3
PCA-RP50/60/71/100/125/140KA
PCA-RP50/60/71/100/125/140KA
PCA-RP71/125HA
PCA-RP71/125HA#1
PKA-RP35/50HAL
PKA-RP35/50HAL
PKA-RP60/71/100KAL
PKA-RP60/71/100KAL
PSA-RP71/100/125/140GA
PSA-RP71/100/125/140GA#1
2
OCH412
OCB412
OCH459
OCB459
OCH454
OCB454
OC329
OCH453
OCB453
OCH452
OCB452
OC332
SAFETY PRECAUTION
2-1. ALWAYS OBSERVE FOR SAFETY
Before obtaining access to termnal, all supply
ciucuits must disconnected.
2-2. CAUTIONS RELATED TO NEW REFRIGERANT
Cautions for units utilizing refrigerant R410A
Use new refrigerant pipes.
Do not use refrigerant other than R410A.
In case of using the existing pipes for R22, be careful with
the followings.
· Change flare nut to the one provided with this product.
Use a newly flared pipe.
· Avoid using thin pipes.
If other refrigerant (R22 etc.) is used, chlorine in refrigerant can cause deterioration of refrigerant oil etc.
Make sure that the inside and outside of refrigerant piping is clean and it has no contamination
such as sulfur hazardous for use, oxides, dirt,
shaving particles, etc.
In addition, use pipes with specified thickness.
Use a vacuum pump with a reverse flow check
valve.
Vacuum pump oil may flow back into refrigerant cycle and
that can cause deterioration of refrigerant oil etc.
Use the following tools specifically designed for
use with R410A refrigerant.
The following tools are necessary to use R410A refrigerant.
Contamination inside refrigerant piping can cause deterioration of refrigerant oil etc.
Gauge manifold
Charge hose
Gas leak detector
Torque wrench
Store the piping to be used indoors during
installation, and keep both ends of the piping
sealed until just before brazing. (Leave elbow
joints, etc. in their packaging.)
If dirt, dust or moisture enters into refrigerant cycle, that can
cause deterioration of refrigerant oil or malfunction of compressor.
2
Tools for R410A
Flare tool
Size adjustment gauge
Vacuum pump adaptor
Electronic refrigerant
charging scale
Use ester oil, ether oil or alkylbenzene oil (small
amount) as the refrigerant oil applied to flares
and flange connections.
Handle tools with care.
If large amount of mineral oil enters, that can cause deterioration of refrigerant oil etc.
Charge refrigerant from liquid phase of gas
cylinder.
If dirt, dust or moisture enters into refrigerant cycle, that can
cause deterioration of refrigerant oil or malfunction of compressor.
Do not use a charging cylinder.
If a charging cylinder is used, the composition of refrigerant will change and the efficiency will be lowered.
If the refrigerant is charged from gas phase, composition
change may occur in refrigerant and the efficiency will be
lowered.
Ventilate the room if refrigerant leaks during
operation. If refrigerant comes into contact with
a flame, poisonous gases will be released.
[1] Cautions for service
(1) Perform service after recovering the refrigerant left in unit completely.
(2) Do not release refrigerant in the air.
(3) After completing service, charge the cycle with specified amount of refrigerant.
(4) When performing service, install a filter drier simultaneously.
Be sure to use a filter drier for new refrigerant.
[2] Additional refrigerant charge
When charging directly from cylinder
· Check that cylinder for R410A on the market is syphon type.
· Charging should be performed with the cylinder of syphon stood vertically. (Refrigerant is charged from liquid phase.)
Unit
Gravimeter
[3] Service tools
Use the below service tools as exclusive tools for R410A refrigerant.
No.
1
Tool name
Gauge manifold
Specifications
· Only for R410A
· Use the existing fitting specifications. (UNF1/2)
· Use high-tension side pressure of 5.3MPa·G or over.
2
Charge hose
3
Electronic scale
· Only for R410A
· Use pressure performance of 5.09MPa·G or over.
4
Gas leak detector
· Use the detector for R134a, R407C or R410A.
5
Adaptor for reverse flow check
· Attach on vacuum pump.
6
Refrigerant charge base
7
Refrigerant cylinder
8
Refrigerant recovery equipment
· Only for R410A
· Top of cylinder (Pink)
· Cylinder with syphon
3
[4] Refrigerant leakage detection function
This air conditioner (outdoor unit PUHZ-RP35~140, except PUHZ-RP200/250) can detect refrigerant leakage which may
happen during a long period of use. In order to enable the leakage detection, settings are required to let the unit memorize the initial conditions (initial learning). Refer to 13-3. INITIAL SETTINGS FOR REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE DETECTION
FUNCTION.
2-3. PRECAUTIONS WHEN REUSING EXISTING R22 REFRIGERANT PIPES
(1) Flowchart
• Refer to the flowchart below to determine if the existing pipes can be used and if it is necessary to use a filter dryer.
• If the diameter of the existing pipes is different from the specified diameter, refer to technological data materials to confirm if
the pipes can be used.
Measure the existing pipe thickness and
check for damage.
The existing pipe thickness does not meet
specifications or the pipes are damaged.
The existing pipe thickness meets specifications and the pipes are not damaged.
▼
Check if the existing air conditioner can operate.
▼
After operating the cooling system for about 30
minutes, do a pump down work.
▼
Disconnect the existing air conditioner from the
pipes.
* If the existing air conditioner cannot operate, use
a refrigerant recovery device to collect the refrigerant.
* In case existing pipes were used for gas or oil
heat pump systems, be sure to clean the pipes
for RP100-250 models.
Use new pipes for RP35-71 models.
▼
Attach the new air conditioner
▼
Perform the airtight test, vacuum air purging,
additional refrigerant charging (if necessary),
and gas leak check.
▼
▼
The existing pipes cannot be reused.
Use new pipes.
Test run
4
(2) Cautions for refrigerant piping work
New refrigerant R410A is adopted for replacement inverter series. Although the refrigerant piping work for R410A is same
as for R22, exclusive tools are necessary so as not to mix with different kind of refrigerant. Furthermore as the working
pressure of R410A is 1.6 time higher than that of R22, their sizes of flared sections and flare nuts are different.
1Thickness of pipes
Because the working pressure of R410A is higher compared to R22, be sure to use refrigerant piping with thickness
shown below. (Never use pipes of 0.7mm or below.)
Diagram below: Piping diameter and thickness
Thickness (mm)
Nominal
Outside
dimensions(inch) diameter (mm)
R410A
R22
0.8
0.8
6.35
1/4
0.8
0.8
9.52
3/8
0.8
0.8
12.70
1/2
1.0
1.0
15.88
5/8
—
1.0
19.05
3/4
2Dimensions of flare cutting and flare nut
The component molecules in HFC refrigerant are smaller compared to conventional refrigerants. In addition to that,
R410A is a refrigerant, which has higher risk of leakage because its working pressure is higher than that of other refrigerants. Therefore, to enhance airtightness and intensity, flare cutting dimension of copper pipe for R410A have been specified separately from the dimensions for other refrigerants as shown below. The dimension B of flare nut for R410A also
have partly been changed to increase intensity as shown below. Set copper pipe correctly referring to copper pipe flaring
dimensions for R410A below. For 1/2 and 5/8 inch, the dimension B changes.
Use torque wrench corresponding to each dimension.
Dimension A
Dimension B
Flare cutting dimensions
Outside
Nominal
diameter
dimensions(inch)
6.35
1/4
9.52
3/8
12.70
1/2
15.88
5/8
19.05
3/4
(mm)
Dimension A ( +0
-0.4 )
R410A
R22
9.0
9.1
13.0
13.2
16.2
16.6
19.4
19.7
—
23.3
Flare nut dimensions
Outside
Nominal
diameter
dimensions(inch)
6.35
1/4
9.52
3/8
12.70
1/2
15.88
5/8
19.05
3/4
(mm)
Dimension B
R22
R410A
17.0
17.0
22.0
22.0
+36.0mm for
24.0
26.0
indoor unit
27.0
29.0 +
of RP100,
—
36.0
125 and 140
3Tools for R410A (The following table shows whether conventional tools can be used or not.)
R410A tools
Can R22 tools be used? Can R407C tools be used?
Tool exclusive for R410A
Tool exclusive for R410A
Tool for HFC refrigerant
Tool exclusive for R410A
Tool exclusive for R410A
Ester oil and alkylbenzene
Ester oil:
Alkylbenzene oil: minimum amount
oil (minimum amount)
Prevent compressor malfunction Tool exclusive for R410A
Safety charger
when charging refrigerant by
spraying liquid refrigerant
Prevent gas from blowing out Tool exclusive for R410A
Charge valve
when detaching charge hose
Vacuum drying and air
Tools for other refrigerants can
Vacuum pump
(Usable if equipped
(Usable if equipped
with adopter for reverwith adopter for reverpurge
be used if equipped with adopse flow)
se flow)
ter for reverse flow check
Flaring work of piping
Tools for other refrigerants
Flare tool
(Usable by adjusting
(Usable by adjusting
can be used by adjusting
flaring dimension)
flaring dimension)
flaring dimension
Bend the pipes
Tools for other refrigerants can be used
Bender
Tools for other refrigerants can be used
Cut the pipes
Pipe cutter
Tools for other refrigerants can be used
Welder and nitrogen gas cylinder Weld the pipes
Tools for other refrigerants can be used
Refrigerant charging scale Refrigerant charge
Vacuum gauge or thermis- Check the degree of vacuum. (Vacuum Tools for other refrigerants
valve prevents back flow of oil and refri- can be used
tor vacuum gauge and
gerant to thermistor vacuum gauge)
vacuum valve
Refrigerant charge
Charging cylinder
Tool exclusive for R410A
: Prepare a new tool. (Use the new tool as the tool exclusive for R410A.)
: Tools for other refrigerants can be used under certain conditions.
: Tools for other refrigerants can be used.
Tools and materials
Gauge manifold
Charge hose
Gas leak detector
Refrigerant recovery equipment
Refrigerant cylinder
Applied oil
Use
Air purge, refrigerant charge
and operation check
Gas leak check
Refrigerant recovery
Refrigerant charge
Apply to flared section
5
3
FEATURES
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
PUHZ-RP60VAH4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
CHARGELESS SYSTEM
PRE-CHARGED REFRIGERANT IS SUPPLIED FOR PIPING LENGTH AT SHIPMENT.
Max. 30m (PUHZ-RP35-250)
The refrigerant circuit with LEV (Linear Expansion Valve) and power receiver always control the optimal refrigerant
level regardless of the length (30m max. and 5m min.) of piping. The additional refrigerant charging work during
installation often causes problems. It is completely eliminated by chargelss system. This unique system improves the quality
and reliability of the work done. It also helps to speed up the installation time.
REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION (except for RP200/250)
PUHZ-RP35-140 can detect refrigerant leakage which may happen during a long period of use.
6
4
SPECIFICATIONS
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
Service Ref.
OUTDOOR UNIT
Mode
Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage)
Max. current
External finish
Refrigerant control
Compressor
Model
Motor output
Starter type
Protection devices
Crankcase heater
Heat exchanger
Fan
Fan(drive) % No.
Fan motor output
Airflow
Defrost method
Noise level
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Dimensions
Weight
Refrigerant
Charge
Oil (Model)
Pipe size O.D.
Connection method
Between the indoor &
outdoor unit
Munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1
Linear Expansion Valve
Hermetic
SNB130FGCH
OUTDOOR UNIT
Crankcase heater
Heat exchanger
Fan
Fan(drive) % No.
Fan motor output
Airflow
Defrost method
Noise level
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Dimensions
Weight
Refrigerant
Charge
Oil (Model)
Pipe size O.D.
Connection method
Between the indoor &
outdoor unit
Inverter
HP switch
Comp.shell thermo
Discharge thermo
—
Plate fin coil
Propeller fan % 1
0.040
35(1,240)
Reverse cycle
44
46
800(31-1/2)
300+23(11-13/16+7/8)
600(23-5/8)
42(93)
R410A
2.5(5.5)
0.45(NEO22)
6.35(1/4)
12.7(1/2)
Flared
Flared
Max. 30m
Max. 50m
dB
dB
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
kg(lbs)
kg(lbs)
L
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
Liquid
Gas
Indoor side
Outdoor side
Height difference
Piping length
Service Ref.
A
kW
W
kW
*/min(CFM)
Cooling
Heating
W
D
H
dB
dB
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
kg(lbs)
kg(lbs)
L
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
Liquid
Gas
Indoor side
Outdoor side
Height difference
Piping length
1.1
0.9
kW
kW
*/min(CFM)
Mode
Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage)
Max. current
External finish
Refrigerant control
Compressor
Model
Motor output
Starter type
Protection devices
Heating
13
13
A
W
Cooling
Heating
W
D
H
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
Heating
Cooling
Single, 50Hz, 230V
Cooling
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
Cooling
Heating
Heating
Cooling
Single, 50Hz, 230V
19
Munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1
Linear Expansion Valve
Hermetic
SNB172FDHM1
1.4
1.6
Inverter
HP switch
Comp.shell thermo
Discharge thermo
—
Plate fin coil
Propeller fan % 1
0.086
55(1,940)
Reverse cycle
47
48
950(37-3/8)
330+30(13+1-3/16)
943(37-1/8)
67(148)
R410A
3.5(7.7)
0.70(FV50S)
9.52(3/8)
15.88(5/8)
Flared
Flared
Max. 30m
Max. 50m
7
PUHZ-RP100VKA
Service Ref.
Mode
Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage)
Max. current
External finish
Refrigerant control
Compressor
Model
OUTDOOR UNIT
Motor output
Starter type
Protection devices
Crankcase heater
Heat exchanger
Fan
Fan(drive) % No.
Fan motor output
Airflow
Defrost method
Noise level
Dimensions
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Between the indoor &
outdoor unit
kW
*/min(CFM)
Cooling
Heating
W
D
H
OUTDOOR UNIT
ANB33FDUMT
ANB42FDWMT
1.9
Charge
Oil (Model)
Pipe size O.D.
Connection method
Between the indoor &
outdoor unit
2.9
2.4
Inverter
—
Plate fin coil
Propeller fan % 2
0.060+0.060
110(3,880)
120(4,230)
Reverse cycle
49
51
dB
dB
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
kg(lbs)
50
52
1,050(41-5/16)
330+30(13+1-3/16)
1,338(52-11/16)
116(256)
R410A
1.40(FV50S)
9.52(3/8)
15.88(5/8)
Flared
Flared
Max. 30m
Max. 75m
L
Liquid
mm(in.)
Gas
mm(in.)
Indoor side
Outdoor side
Height difference
Piping length
Cooling
A
119(262)
5.0(11.0)
kg(lbs)
Motor output
Starter type
Protection devices
REFRIGERANT PIPING
28
W
Mode
Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage)
Max. current
External finish
Refrigerant control
Compressor
Model
Weight
Refrigerant
Heating
26.5
PUHZ-RP100YKA
Dimensions
Cooling
Munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1
Linear Expansion Valve
Hermetic
Service Ref.
Crankcase heater
Heat exchanger
Fan
Fan(drive) % No.
Fan motor output
Airflow
Defrost method
Noise level
PUHZ-RP140VKA
Heating
Cooling
Single 50Hz, 230V
HP switch
Comp.shell ther mo
Discharge thermo
Charge
Connection method
PUHZ-RP125VKA
Heating
A
kW
Weight
Refrigerant
Oil (Model)
Pipe size O.D.
Cooling
Heating
8
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
Heating
Cooling
3phase, 50Hz, 400V
9.5
Munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1
Linear Expansion Valve
Hermetic
Cooling
13
ANB33FDVMT
kW
1.9
Heating
ANB42FDXMT
2.9
2.4
Inverter
HP switch
Comp.shell ther mo
Discharge thermo
—
Plate fin coil
Propeller fan % 2
0.060+0.060
W
kW
*/min(CFM)
Cooling
Heating
W
D
H
dB
dB
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
kg(lbs)
110(3,880)
120(4,230)
Reverse cycle
49
51
124(273)
50
52
1,050(41-5/16)
330+30(13+1-3/16)
1,338(52-11/16)
126(278)
R410A
5.0(11.0)
kg(lbs)
1.40(FV50S)
9.52(3/8)
15.88(5/8)
Flared
Flared
Max. 30m
Max. 75m
L
mm(in.)
Liquid
mm(in.)
Gas
Indoor side
Outdoor side
Height difference
Piping length
8
132(291)
Service Ref.
PUHZ-RP200YKA
OUTDOOR UNIT
Mode
Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage)
Max. current
External finish
Refrigerant control
Compressor
Model
Motor output
Starter type
Protection devices
Crankcase heater
Heat exchanger
Fan
Fan(drive) % No.
Fan motor output
Airflow
Defrost method
Noise level
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Dimensions
Weight
Refrigerant
Charge
Oil (Model)
Pipe size O.D.
Connection method
Between the indoor &
outdoor unit
A
19
Heating
21
Munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1
Linear Expansion Valve
Hermetic
ANB66FFRMT
5.5
ANB52FFQMT
4.7
kW
Inverter
HP switch
Comp.shell ther mo
Discharge thermo
—
Plate fin coil
Propeller fan % 2
0.150 + 0.150
140(4,940)
Reverse cycle
W
kW
*/min(CFM)
Cooling
Heating
W
D
H
PUHZ-RP250YKA
Heating
Cooling
3 phase 50Hz, 400V
Cooling
58
59
58
59
dB
dB
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
kg(lbs)
1,050(41-5/16)
330 + 30(13+1-3/16)
1,338(52-11/16)
141(311)
135(297)
R410A
7.7(17.0)
1.70(FV50S)
12.7(1/2)
25.4(1)
7.1(15.7)
1.70(FV50S)
9.52(3/8)
25.4(1)
kg(lbs)
L
mm(in.)
mm(in.)
Liquid
Gas
Indoor side
Outdoor side
Height difference
Piping length
Flared
Flared & Brazing
Max. 30m
Max. 120m
9
5
DATA
5-1. REFILLING REFRIGERANT CHARGE (R410A : kg) PUHZ-RP35~140
Service Ref.
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
10m
2.1
2.1
3.1
3.1
20m
2.3
2.3
3.3
3.3
Piping length (one way)
30m
40m
50m
2.5
2.7
2.9
2.5
2.7
2.9
3.5
4.1
4.7
3.5
4.1
4.7
60m
—
—
—
—
75m
—
—
—
—
Initial
charged
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.5
4.6
4.8
5.0
5.6
6.2
6.8
7.5
5.0
4.6
4.8
5.0
5.6
6.2
6.8
7.5
5.0
4.6
4.8
5.0
5.6
6.2
6.8
7.5
5.0
Longer pipe than 30m, additional charge is
required.
5-2. ADJUSTING THE AMOUNT OF REFRIGERANT PUHZ-RP200/250
Permitted
pipe length
Service Ref.
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
Initial charge
(kg)
Amount of additional refrigerant charge (kg)
30 m and less
7.1
120m or less
No additional
charge necessary
7.7
31-40 m and less 41-50 m and less 51-60 m and less 61-70 m and less
0.9 kg
1.8 kg
2.7 kg
3.6 kg
1.2 kg
2.4 kg
3.6 kg
4.8 kg
71-120 m and less
The additional charge
amount is obtained by
the following formula.
Calculate the additional charge amount based on the following procedure.
If the calculation results in an amount that is smaller than the "Additional charge amount for 70m," perform the additional charge using the amount shown
in "Additional charge amount for 70m."
Amount of additional
charge [kg]
Main piping:
= Liquid line size
:12.7 over all length [m]
% 0.11 [kg/m]
+
Main piping:
Liquid line size
:9.52 overall length [m]
% 0.09 [kg/m]
+
Branch piping: Liquid
line size
:9.52 overall length [m]
% 0.06 [kg/m]
+
Branch piping: Liquid
line size
:6.35 overall length [m]
% 0.02 [kg/m]
–
3.6 (kg)
Additional charge amount RP200 3.6 kg
for 70 m
RP250 4.8 kg
5-3. COMPRESSOR TECHNICAL DATA
Service Ref.
PUHZ-RP35/50VHA4 PUHZ-RP60/71VHA4 PUHZ-RP100/125VKA PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP100/125YKA PUHZ-RP140YKA
SNB172FDHM1
ANB33FDUMT
ANB42FDWMT
ANB33FDVMT
ANB42FDXMT
0.64
1.34
0.466
0.302
1.20
1.20
0.64
1.34
0.466
0.302
1.20
1.20
0.64
1.34
0.466
0.302
1.20
1.20
Compressor model SNB130FGCH
U-V
Winding
Resistance U-W
()
W-V
(at 20°C)
(at 20°C)
Service Ref.
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
Compressor model
ANB52FFQMT
ANB66FFRMT
U-V
Winding
Resistance U-W
()
W-V
0.30
0.37
0.30
0.37
0.30
0.37
10
5-4. NOISE CRITERION CURVES
MICROPHONE
1m
UNIT
1.5m
GROUND
90
MODE SPL(dB)
COOLING
44
HEATING
46
LINE
70
NC-70
60
NC-60
50
NC-50
40
NC-40
30
NC-30
10
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR
CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
NC-20
125
250
500 1000 2000 4000
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
MODE SPL(dB)
COOLING
49
HEATING
51
LINE
NC-70
60
NC-60
50
NC-50
40
NC-40
30
NC-30
20
10
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR
CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
NC-20
250
500
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
1000
2000
4000
8000
MODE SPL(dB)
COOLING
50
HEATING
52
LINE
90
70
NC-70
60
NC-60
50
NC-50
40
NC-40
30
NC-30
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR
CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
NC-20
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 μbar)
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 μbar)
70
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz
80
10
LINE
80
8000
90
20
MODE SPL(dB)
COOLING
47
HEATING
48
90
80
20
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 μbar)
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 μbar)
PUHZ-RP35/50VHA4
80
70
NC-70
60
NC-60
50
NC-50
40
NC-40
30
NC-30
20
10
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR
CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
NC-20
250
500
1000
2000
4000
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz
11
8000
MODE
COOLING
HEATING
SPL(dB)
50
52
LINE
PUHZ-RP200YKA
90
80
70
NC-70
60
NC-60
50
NC-50
40
NC-40
30
NC-30
20
10
MODE SPL(dB)
COOLING
58
HEATING
59
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR
CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
NC-20
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz
80
70
NC-70
60
NC-60
50
NC-50
40
NC-40
30
NC-30
20
10
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR
CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
NC-20
250
500
1000
2000
4000
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz
PUHZ-RP250YKA
MODE SPL(dB)
COOLING
58
HEATING
59
LINE
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 μbar)
90
80
70
NC-70
60
NC-60
50
NC-50
40
NC-40
30
NC-30
20
10
LINE
90
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 μbar)
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 μbar)
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR
CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63
125
NC-20
250
500
1000
2000
4000
8000
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz
12
8000
5-5. STANDARD OPERATION DATA
PLA-RP35BA
Representative matching
Electrical circuit
Total
Mode
Refrigerant circuit
PLA-RP60BA
PLA-RP71BA2
Cooling
Heating
Cooling
Heating
Cooling
Heating
Cooling
Heating
Capacity
W
3,600
4,100
5,000
6,000
6,000
7,000
7,100
8,000
Input
kW
1.07
1.12
1.55
1.62
1.60
1.82
1.90
1.90
Indoor unit
PLA-RP35BA
PLA-RP50BA
PLA-RP60BA
PLA-RP71BA2
Phase , Hz
1 , 50
1 , 50
1 , 50
1 , 50
230
230
230
230
Voltage
V
Current
A
Outdoor unit
0.22
0.14
0.36
0.29
0.36
0.29
0.51
0.43
PUHZ-RP35VHA4 PUHZ-RP50VHA4 PUHZ-RP60VHA4 PUHZ-RP71VHA4
Phase , Hz
Outdoor Indoor side
side
PLA-RP50BA
1 , 50
1 , 50
1 , 50
1 , 50
230
230
230
230
Voltage
V
Current
A
4.66
4.93
6.72
7.08
6.95
7.98
8.20
8.25
Discharge pressure
MPa
2.70
2.69
2.91
2.76
2.64
2.90
2.73
2.65
Suction pressure
MPa
1.01
0.74
0.99
0.67
0.96
0.74
0.95
0.71
Discharge temperature
°C
70
71
73
77
67
80
69
72
Condensing temperature
°C
46
41
49
44
44
46
45
43
Suction temperature
°C
15
2
11
-1
11
3
12
3
Ref. pipe length
m
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
D.B.
°C
27
20
27
20
27
20
27
20
W.B.
°C
19
15
19
15
19
15
19
15
D.B.
°C
15.8
34.6
15.3
37.8
14.2
39.2
14.5
38.8
D.B.
°C
35
7
35
7
35
7
35
7
W.B.
°C
24
6
24
6
24
6
24
6
SHF
0.84
—
0.81
—
0.76
—
0.73
—
BF
0.28
—
0.24
—
0.21
—
0.21
—
Intake air temperature
Discharge air temperature
Intake air temperature
The unit of pressure has been changed to MPa based on international SI system.
The conversion factor is : 1(MPa)=10.2(kgf/cm2)
13
PLA-RP100BA3
Representative matching
Electrical circuit
Total
Mode
Refrigerant circuit
PLA-RP140BA2
Cooling
Heating
Cooling
Heating
Cooling
Heating
Capacity
W
10,000
11,200
12,500
14,000
14,000
16,000
Input
kW
2.39
2.43
3.67
3.50
4.36
4.32
Indoor unit
PLA-RP100BA3
PLA-RP125BA2
PLA-RP140BA2
Phase , Hz
1 , 50
1 , 50
1 , 50
230
230
230
Voltage
V
Current
A
Outdoor unit
1.00
0.94
1.07
1.00
1.07
1.00
PUHZ-RP100VKA/
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA/
PUHZ-RP125YKA
1/3, 50
1/3, 50
1/3, 50
230/400
230/400
230/400
Phase , Hz
Outdoor Indoor side
side
PLA-RP125BA2
PUHZ-RP140VKA/
PUHZ-RP140YKA
Voltage
V
Current
A
10.4/3.51
10.26/3.59
15.73/5.51
15.20/5.26
18.83/6.59
18.69/6.54
Discharge pressure
MPa
2.61
2.39
2.75
2.81
2.78
2.89
Suction pressure
MPa
0.99
0.72
0.85
0.69
0.83
0.66
Discharge temperature
°C
67
66
72
81
71
83
Condensing temperature
°C
44
38
46
46
46
47
Suction temperature
°C
15
4
8
5
7
5
Ref. pipe length
m
5
5
5
5
5
5
D.B.
°C
27
20
27
20
27
20
W.B.
°C
19
15
19
15
19
15
D.B.
°C
14.5
38.5
12.5
42.3
11.3
44.7
D.B.
°C
35
7
35
7
35
7
W.B.
°C
24
6
24
6
24
6
SHF
0.74
—
0.71
—
0.71
—
BF
0.21
—
0.18
—
0.14
—
Intake air temperature
Discharge air temperature
Intake air temperature
The unit of pressure has been changed to MPa based on international SI system.
The conversion factor is : 1(MPa)=10.2(kgf/cm2)
14
PLA-RP100BA3 ×2
Representative matching
Total
Mode
Cooling
Heating
Cooling
Heating
Capacty
W
19,000
22,400
22,000
27,000
Input
kW
5.50
5.70
6.83
7.48
PLA-RP100BA3
Indoor unit
Electrical circuit
Phase , Hz
Voltage
V
Current
A
Outdoor unit
Refrigerant circuit
PLA-RP125BA2
1, 50
1, 50
230
230
1.00 × 2
0.94 × 2
1.07 x 2
1.00 × 2
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
3, 50
3, 50
400
400
Phase , Hz
Outdoor Indoor side
side
PLA-RP125BA2 ×2
Voltage
V
Current
A
8.19
8.50
10.24
11.26
Discharge pressure
Mpa
2.72
2.30
2.96
2.67
Suction pressure
Mpa
0.95
0.64
0.88
0.61
Discharge temperature
˚C
72
70
72
77
Condensing temperature
˚C
46
38
49
44
Suction temperature
˚C
16
2
11
3
Ref. pipe length
m
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
D.B.
˚C
27
20
27
20
W.B.
˚C
19
15
19
15
D.B.
˚C
14.4
38.5
13.2
41.5
D.B.
˚C
35
7
35
7
W.B.
˚C
24
6
24
6
SHF
0.79
–
0.77
–
BF
0.13
–
0.10
–
Intake air temperature
Discharge air temperature
Intake air temperature
The unit of pressure has been changed to MPa based on international SI system.
The conversion factor is : 1(MPa)=10.2(kgf/cm2)
15
6
OUTLINES AND DIMENSIONS
Unit : mm
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
400
:33 drain hole
347.5
365
300
Air intake
:33 drain hole
330
155
152
43.6
Air intake
45.4
4-10 % 21 oval hole
(M10 foundation bolt)
18
23
32.5
40
Service panel
Service panel
for charge plug
Air discharge
Handle for
moving
150
43
183
69
287.5
Connection for
gas pipe
90
10
155
300
35
600
Connection for
liquid pipe
Service port
Installation bolt pitch: 500
800
1. FOUNDATION BOLTS
Piping and wiring connection can
be made from the rear direction only.
3. ATTACHING THE CONDUIT
<Foundation bolt height>
In order to attach the conduit, it is
necessary to fix the metal plate with
2 screws to the back panel. Procure
the metal plate and make screw holes
locally. It is recommended to use the
metal plate shown below. Align the
metal plate to the marks on the unit
and attach it.
+1
18 or below
100
m
Basically open
Free space around the outdoor unit
(basic example)
100 mm or more as long as
no obstacle is placed on the
rear and right-and-left sides
of the unit.
2. PIPING-WIRING DIRECTION
Please secure the unit firmly
with 4 foundation (M10) bolts.
(Bolts, washer and nut must
be purchased locally.)
re
r mo
mo
m
0
10
FOUNDATION
mo
rm
ore
+1
+2
ore
or m
mm
500
40
350
mm
o
+ The position and the size of
conduit hole depend on the
conduit to be used.
20
rm
ore
2 sides should be open in
the right, left and rear side.
+ 1 In the place where short cycle tends to occur, cooling and heating
capacity and power consumption might get lowered 10%. Air outlet
guide (optional PAC-SG58SG) will help them improve.
+ 2 If air discharges to the wall, the surface might get stained.
Holes for metal plate fixing screw
+ The size of hole depends on the
screw to be used.
16
80
Minimum installation space for outdoor unit
60
+ Conduit hole
FREE
over 100mm
Service space
Over10
Front piping hole
(Knockout)
Front trunking hole
(Knockout)
92
:92
40
65
45
Power supply wiring hole
(2-:27Knockout)
19
92
55
Right piping hole
(Knockout)
75
Piping Knockout Hole Details
Air Intake
500
Over
Handle for moving
Refrigerant GAS pipe connction (FLARE):15.88(5/8 inch)
Refrigerant LIQUID pipe connection (FLARE):9.52(3/8 inch)
*1...Indication of STOP VALVE connection location.
Example of Notes
over 500mm
over 10mm
40
:92
Over100
500
65
Right trunking hole
(Knockout)
45
92
:92
40
Side Air Intake
Handle for moving
Handle for moving
Rear Air Intake
Rear piping hole
(Knockout)
Power supply wiring hole
(2-:27Knockout)
Rear trunking hole
(Knockout)
FOUNDATION
<Foundation bolt height>
Piping and wiring connections
can be made from 4 directions:
front, right, rear and below.
Please secure the unit firmly
with 4 foundation (M10) bolts.
(Bolts and washers must be
purchased locally.)
Handle for moving
Side Air Intake
4 PIPING-WIRING DIRECTIONS
Power supply wiring hole
(2-:27Knockout)
Over
3 FOUNDATION BOLTS
30
322
600
145
145
Earth terminal
950
Installation Feet
Air Discharge
220
175
145
Rear Air Intake
41
Drain hole
(5-:33)
71
2
1
Handle for moving
Service panel
Terminal Connections
Left···Power supply wiring
Reight···Indoor/Outdoor wiring
2-12 % 36 oval holes
(Foundation Bolt M10)
57
175
2-U Shaped notched holes
(Foundation Bolt M10)
417
2 SERVICE SPACE
Dimensions of space needed
for service access are
shown in the below diagram.
943
over 10mm
55
27
330
30
23
19
370
28
Front piping cover
Rear piping cover
Bottom piping hole
(Knockout)
*1 431
The diagram below shows a
basic example.
Explantion of particular details is
given in the installation manuals etc.
73 63
23
30
55
27
63
23 27 92
73
Less than
73 63
23
473
219
81
40
54
53
71
673
17
*1 447
1 FREE SPACE (Around the unit)
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
Unit : mm
FREE
Over 150mm
Over 10mm
Over
10
Service space
Handle for moving
Front piping hole
(Knock-Out)
92
ø92
60
Over
500
Rear Air Intake
FOUNDATION
<Foundation bolt height>
Handle for moving
Side Air Intake
Piping and wiring connections
can be made from 4 directions:
FRONT,Right,Rear and Below.
4 PIPING-WIRING DIRECTIONS
75
55
29 92
ø92
75
92
Power supply wiring hole Power supply wiring hole
(ø27Knock-Out)
(ø40Knock-Out)
Power supply wiring hole
Power
supply
wiring
hole
Power supply wiring hole (ø27Knock-Out)
Power supply wiring hole
(ø27Knock-Out)
(ø40Knock-Out)
(ø40Knock-Out)
Right piping hole
Right trunking hole
Rear trunking hole
Front trunking hole
60 55
55 60
(Knock-Out)
(Knock-Out)
75 50
(Knock-Out)
(Knock-Out)
Piping Knock-Out Hole Details
Model
A
PUHZ-RP100~140VKA 1067
PUHZ-RP100~140YKA 919
3 FOUNDATION BOLTS
Less than
30
Dimensions of space needed Please secure the unit firmly
for service access are
with 4 foundation (M10) bolts.
shown in the below diagram. (Bolts and washers must be
purchased locally.)
2 SERVICE SPACE
1 ···Refrigerant GAS pipe connection (FLARE)ø15.88(5/8F)
2 ···Refrigerant LIQUID pipe connection (FLARE)ø 9.52(3/8F)
*1···Indication of STOP VALVE connection location.
Example of Notes
Over 1000mm
Over 10mm
63
55
73
27
26
63
92
27
73
26
2
ø9
Rear piping hole
(Knock-Out)
Side Air Intake
330
1 FREE SPACE (Around the unit)
Handle for moving
1338
Over
150
Over
500
60
632
369
45
110 160
362
225
160
160
1
Drain hole
(5-ø33)
2
60
42
81
Handle for moving
Service panel
Bottom piping hole
(Knock-Out)
Front piping cover
Rear piping cover
Air intake
Terminal connection
Left···Power supply wiring
Right···Indoor/Outdoor wiring
2-12×36 Oval holes
(Foundation Bolt M10)
56
40
0
53
2-U Shaped notched holes
(Foundation Bolt M10)
225
70
Earth terminal
1050
Air Discharge
600
Installation Feet
Rear Air Intake
28
86
The diagram below shows a
basic example.
Explantion of particular details are
given in the installation manuals etc.
63
26
73
55
27
60
A
30
26
154
19
370
417
*1 442
*1 450
18
136
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
Unit : mm
Over 10mm
Over 150mm
Service space
Over
10
Over
500
A
450
424
Front piping hole
(Knock-Out)
Front trunking hole
(Knock-Out)
Power supply wiring hole
(ø40Knock-Out)
92
ø92
75
60 55
Handle for
moving
Over
150
29
55
92
75 50
ø92
Less than
30
Right trunking hole
(Knock-Out)
75
92
55 60
Power supply wiring hole
(ø27Knock-Out)
Rear Air Intake
FOUNDATION
<Foundation bolt height>
Power supply wiring hole
(ø40Knock-Out)
Over
500
Power supply wiring hole
(ø27Knock-Out)
Right piping hole
(Knock-Out)
Power supply wiring hole
(ø27Knock-Out)
Piping Knock-Out Hole Details
ø9.52(3/8F)
ø12.7(1/2F)
2 connection
60
Model
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
1 ···Refrigerant GAS pipe connection (attached JOINT)ø25.4(Brazing locally)
2 ···Refrigerant LIQUID pipe connection (FLARE)
*1···Indication of STOP VALVE connection location.
*2···(FLARE)ø 19.05(3/4F)
Example of Notes
Over 1000mm
Over 10mm
60
3 FOUNDATION BOLTS
55
FREE
2 SERVICE SPACE
2
Rear piping hole
(Knock-Out)
ø9
Rear trunking hole
(Knock-Out)
Power supply wiring hole
(ø40Knock-Out)
Handle for
moving
Side Air Intake
Piping and wiring connections
can be made from 4 directions:
FRONT,Right,Rear and Below.
4 PIPING-WIRING DIRECTIONS
Handle for moving
Side Air Intake
1338
Dimensions of space needed Please secure the unit firmly
for service access are
with 4 foundation (M10) bolts.
shown in the below diagram. (Bolts and washers must be
purchased locally.)
60
632
369
330
30
26
1 FREE SPACE (Around the unit)
63
55
73
27
26
63
92
27
26
73
73 63
26
27
154
Rear Air Intake
160
160
1050
Earth terminal
Air Discharge
600
Installation Feet
110 160
362
225
45
136
2
42
Drain hole
(5-ø33)
1
Handle for moving
Service panel
81
Bottom piping hole
(Knock-Out)
Front piping cover
Rear piping cover
Air intake
Terminal connection
Left···Power supply wiring
Right···Indoor/Outdoor wiring
2-12×36 Oval holes
(Foundation Bolt M10)
60
Brazing
70
56
40
0
53
2-U Shaped notched holes
(Foundation Bolt M10)
225
19
370
417
28
342
*1 A
*1,*2 : 442
86
19
982
986
The diagram below shows a
basic example.
Explantion of particular details are
given in the installation manuals etc.
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
Unit : mm
7
WIRING DIAGRAM
PUHZ-RP35VHA4 PUHZ-RP50VHA4
SYMBOL
TB1
MC
MF1
21S4
63H
TH3, TH33
TH4
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH32
LEV-A, LEV-B
ACL
CY1,CY2
P.B.
TABR/S
TABU/V/W
NAME
Terminal Block<Power Supply, Indoor/Outdoor>
Motor for Compressor
Fan Motor
Solenoid Valve (Four-Way Valve)
High Pressure Switch
Thermistor<Outdoor Pipe>
Thermistor<Discharge>
Thermistor<Outdoor 2-Phase Pipe>
Thermistor<Outdoor>
Thermistor<Heat Sink>
Thermistor<Shell>
Electronic Expansion Valve
Reactor
Reactor
Power Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<L/N-Phase>
Connection Terminal<U/V/W-Phase>
SYMBOL
IPM
PFC
CB1~CB3
N.F.
LI/LO
NI/NO
EI,E2,E3
52C
C.B.
SW1
NAME
Power Module
Converter
Main Smoothing Capacitor
Noise Filter Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<L-Phase>
Connection Terminal<N-Phase>
Connection Terminal<Ground>
52C Relay
Controller Circuit Board
Switch<Forced Defrost, Defect History
Record Reset, Refrigerant Address>
Switch<Test Operation>
Switch<Function Switch>
Switch<Model Select>
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
SYMBOL
LED1,LED2
NAME
LED
<Operation Inspection Indicators>
Fuse<T6.3AL250V>
Switch<Pump Down>
Connector<Emergency Operation>
Connector<Connection for Option>
Connector<Connection for Option>
Connector<A-Control Service Inspection Kit>
Connector
<Connected to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
<Connected to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
< Connected for Option (Contact Input)>
Relay
F1~4
SWP
CN31
CN51
SS
CNM
CNMNT
CNVMNT
CNDM
X51,X52
When M-NET adapter is connected
M
M
5
C. B.
t° t°
t°
LEV-A
(WHT)
1
1
CN2
(WHT)
3
1
TRANS
1
3
1
7
14
1 2
F1
3
1
2
21S4 3
(GRN)
F4
4
3
A B S
1
TB7
5
M-NET
1
X51
X52
2
CND
(WHT)
3 1
3
1 2
5
F3
CNAC
(WHT)
1
M-NET ADAPTER
2
1
CN31
CN52C
(RED)
2
F2
5
CNM
(WHT)
CN4
(WHT)
CNDC 1
(PNK)
3
3
LEV-B CNVMNT CNMNT
(RED) (WHT) (WHT)
SW6
2 1
SW1
12
LED4
CNDM
(WHT)
4
TH7/6 TH3 TH4
(RED) (WHT) (WHT)
SW12
LED3
CN51
(WHT)
1
SW5
12
6
*1
SW4 SWP SW8
3
1
LED1
1
TH33 TH32
(YLW) (BLK)
6
63H
(YLW)
CNS
(WHT)
LED2
*1
1
SW1
1
5
t°
LED2
MF1
MS
3~
CNF1
7 (WHT)
1
t°
SW9 SW7
t°
5
3
SW11
CN5
(WHT)
LEV-B
LED5 CN2M
(WHT)
LED1
63H
TH33 TH32 TH7 TH6 TH3 TH4
LEV-A
1
3
1 SS
(WHT)
21S4
RED
RED
RED
WHT
WHT
WHT
N. F.
ACL
PFC
2
CN4 1
(WHT) 2
2
2
CN52C
(BLK)
CN5 1
(RED) 2
2
1
52C
BLK
WHT
NO
U
RED
P. B.
LO
MC
MS
3~
W V
IPM
E3
1
TH8
CN3 1
(WHT) 2
3
t°
CNAC2
(RED)
TABV
TABW
RED
WHT
TABS
5
1
CN5
(RED)
TABU
TABR
BLK
CN2
(WHT)
CB1
CB2
CB3
1
7
2
2
E2
BLK
1
CNAC1
(WHT)
3
*1MODEL SELECT
*2. SW5 -1 to 5 : Function Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6
L
N
CY1
CY2
S1
S2
NI
LI
BRN
YLW
ON
OFF
U
EI
BLK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ORN
ON
OFF
U
1 2 3 4 5 6
GRN/YLW
50V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW5-6 *2
ON
OFF
BLU
35V
SW6
ON
OFF
RED
MODEL
S3 TB1
M-NET ADAPTER
INDOOR
UNIT
POWER SUPPLY
~/N 230V 50Hz
SYMBOL
TB7
CN5
CND
CN2M
SW1
SW11
20
NAME
Terminal Block<M-net connection>
Connector<Transmission>
Connector<Power Supply>
Connector<M-NET communication>
Switch<Status of communication>
Switch<Address setting : 1s digit>
SYMBOL
SW12
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
NAME
Switch<Address setting : 10s digit>
LED<Power Supply : DC5V>
LED<Connection to Outdoor Unit>
LED<Transmission : Sending>
LED<Transmission : Recelving>
LED<Power Supply : DC12V>
PUHZ-RP60VHA4 PUHZ-RP71VHA4
SYMBOL
TB1
MC
MF1
21S4
63H
TH3, TH33
TH4
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH32
LEV-A, LEV-B
ACL
CY1,CY2
P.B.
TABR/S
TABU/V/W
IPM
NAME
Terminal Block<Power Supply, Indoor/Outdoor>
Motor for Compressor
Fan Motor
Solenoid Valve (Four-Way Valve)
High Pressure Switch
Thermistor<Outdoor Pipe>
Thermistor<Discharge>
Thermistor<Outdoor 2-Phase Pipe>
Thermistor<Outdoor>
Thermistor<Heat Sink>
Thermistor<Shell>
Electronic Expansion Valve
Reactor
Reactor
Power Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<L/N-Phase>
Connection Terminal<U/V/W-Phase>
Power Module
SYMBOL
PFC
CB1~CB3
N.F.
LI/LO
NI/NO
EI,E2,E3
52C
C.B.
SW1
NAME
Converter
Main Smoothing Capacitor
Noise Filter Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<L-Phase>
Connection Terminal<N-Phase>
Connection Terminal<Ground>
52C Relay
Controller Circuit Board
Switch<Forced Defrost, Defect History
Record Reset, Refrigerant Address>
Switch<Test Operation>
Switch<Function Switch>
Switch<Model Select>
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch
LED
<Operation Inspection Indicators>
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
LED1,LED2
SYMBOL
F1~4
SWP
CN31
CN51
SS
CNM
CNMNT
NAME
Fuse<T6.3AL250V>
Switch<Pump Down>
Connector<Emergency Operation>
Connector<Connection for Option>
Connector<Connection for Option>
Connector<A-Control Service Inspection Kit>
Connector
<Connected to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
<Connected to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
< Connected for Option (Contact Input)>
Relay
CNVMNT
CNDM
X51,X52
When M-NET adapter is connected
TH33 TH32 TH7 TH6 TH3 TH4
LEV-A
LEV-B
M
M
5
t°
1
2 1
LEV-A
(WHT)
1
6
1
6
1
CN2
(WHT)
3
1
TRANS
1
3
1
7
14
1 2
F1
3
1
2
21S4 3
(GRN)
F4
4
3
A B S
1
TB7
5
M-NET
1
X51
X52
2
CND
(WHT)
3 1
3
1 2
5
F3
CNAC
(WHT)
1
M-NET ADAPTER
2
1
CN31
CN52C
(RED)
2
F2
5
CNM
(WHT)
CN4
(WHT)
CNDC 1
(PNK)
3
3
LEV-B CNVMNT CNMNT
(RED) (WHT) (WHT)
SW6
12
SW1
4
TH7/6 TH3 TH4
(RED) (WHT) (WHT)
CNDM
(WHT)
1
LED4
CN51
(WHT)
12
SW4 SWP SW8
3
LED1
1
TH33 TH32
(YLW) (BLK)
SW12
LED3
*1
SW5
*1
63H
(YLW)
CNS
(WHT)
LED2
t°
LED5 CN2M
(WHT)
LED1
t° t°
LED2
MF1
MS
3~
t°
SW11
SW1
1
5
SW9 SW7
t°
CNF1
7 (WHT)
5
3
C. B.
1
CN5
(WHT)
63H
1
3
1 SS
(WHT)
21S4
RED
RED
WHT
WHT
RED
WHT
N. F.
ACL
MS
3~
NO
PFC
2
CN4 1
(WHT) 2
2
2
CN52C
(BLK)
CN5 1
(RED) 2
2
1
52C
U
RED
BLK
P. B.
WHT
W V
LO
MC
IPM
TABV
TABW
RED
WHT
TABS
E3
3
TH8
CN3 1
(WHT) 2
1
t°
CNAC2
(RED)
TABR
BLK
5
1
CN5
(RED)
TABU
CN2
(WHT)
CB1
CB2
CB3
1
7
2
2
E2
BLK
*1MODEL SELECT
CNAC1
(WHT)
L
N
NI
EI
CY1
CY2
S1
S2
S3 TB1
INDOOR
UNIT
POWER SUPPLY
~/N 230V 50Hz
U
LI
BRN
YLW
1 2 3 4 5 6
U
BLK
*2. SW5 -1 to 5 : Function Switch
3
1 2 3 4 5 6
ORN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
1
GRN/YLW
71V
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW5-6 *2
ON
OFF
BLU
60V
SW6
ON
OFF
RED
MODEL
M-NET ADAPTER
SYMBOL
TB7
CN5
CND
CN2M
SW1
SW11
21
NAME
Terminal Block<M-net connection>
Connector<Transmission>
Connector<Power Supply>
Connector<M-NET communication>
Switch<Status of communication>
Switch<Address setting : 1s digit>
SYMBOL
SW12
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
NAME
Switch<Address setting : 10s digit>
LED<Power Supply : DC5V>
LED<Connection to Outdoor Unit>
LED<Transmission : Sending>
LED<Transmission : Receiving>
LED<Power Supply : DC12V>
PUHZ-RP100VKA PUHZ-RP125VKA PUHZ-RP140VKA
SYMBOL
LI
NI
P2
N2
DCL1,DCL2
IGBT
EI,E2,E3,E4
C.B.
SW1
NAME
Connection Terminal<L-Phase>
Connection Terminal<N-Phase>
Connection Terminal
Connection Terminal
Connection Terminal<Reactor>
Power Module
Connection Terminal<Ground>
Controller Circuit Board
Switch<Forced Defrost, Defect History Record
Reset, Refrigerant Address>
Switch<Test Operation>
Switch<Function Switch>
Switch<Model Select>
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
SYMBOL
SWP
CN31
CN51
SS
CNM
CNMNT
CNVMNT
CNDM
LED1, LED2
F1~F4
X51,X52
RP140 only
LEV-C
M
M
TH33 TH32 TH7 TH6 TH3 TH4
C. B.
t°
t°
t° t°
3
12
t°
t°
12
2 1
CNF2
(WHT)
1
3
1
TRANS
2
CNDC 1
(PNK)
1
5
1
14
CNM
(WHT)
CN52C
(RED)
CN4
(WHT)
7
1
CNVMNT CNMNT
(WHT) (WHT)
LEV-C 6
(BLU)
1
1 2
F1
3
1
2
3
21S4 3
(GRN)
F4
4
1
3
SW12
LED4
2
1
M-NET ADAPTER
CN2M
(WHT)
CND
(WHT)
3 1
CN31
X51
F3
CNAC
(WHT)
LED3
*1
3
2
1
3
CN2
(WHT)
LEV-B
(RED)
3
7
F2
CNS
(WHT)
3
63H
(YLW)
LEV-A
(WHT)
1
X52
1
*1
6
CNDM
(WHT)
TH33 TH32 TH7/6 TH3 TH4
(YLW) (BLK) (RED) (WHT) (WHT)
7
1
6
3
3
1
CN51
(WHT)
1
SW5
4
SW4 SWP SW8
1
SW11
CN5
(WHT) SW1
1
LED2
5
5
1
LED1
1
CNF1
(WHT)
LED2
5
A B S
TB7
M-NET
1
1 SS
(WHT)
21S4
2
P. B.
1
2
CN4
(WHT)
1
CN2
(WHT)
CN52C
3 (RED)
1
7
52C
52C
BLK
2
WHT
E3
CNDC
(PNK)
N2
3
CB
1
CNAC2
(RED)
1
P2
RED
IGBT
3
BLK
E2
1
3
CNAC1
(WHT)
E4
W V U
DCL2
DCL
W V U
MS
3~
DCL1
EI
*1. MODEL SELECT
ON
100V OFF
ON
125V OFF
ON
140V OFF
L
SW6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LI
N
S1
S2
BRN
GRN/YLW
YLW
BLU
ORN
M-NET ADAPTER
MC
MODEL
NI U
U
BLK
BLK
RED
MF2
MS
3~
5
5
3
5
7
BLK
WHT
RED
MF1
MS
3~
When M-NET adapter is connected
M
SW6
LEV-B
SW9 SW7
LEV-A
SW1
63H
NAME
Switch<Pump Down>
Connector<Emergency Operation>
Connector<Connection for Option>
Connector<Connection for Option>
Connector<A-Control Service Inspection Kit>
Connector
<Connected to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
<Connected to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
< Connected for Option (Contact Input)>
LED<Operation Inspection Indicators>
Fuse< T6.3AL250V>
Relay
LED1
NAME
Terminal Block<Power Supply, Indoor/Outdoor >
Motor for Compressor
Fan Motor
Solenoid Valve (Four-Way Valve)
High Pressure Switch
Thermistor<Outdoor Pipe>
Thermistor<Discharge>
Thermistor<Outdoor 2-Phase Pipe>
Thermistor<Outdoor>
Thermistor<Shell>
Electronic Expansion Valve
Reactor
Main Smoothing Capacitor
Capacitor
Power Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<U/V/W-Phase>
LED5
SYMBOL
TB1
MC
MF1, MF2
21S4
63H
TH3, TH33
TH4
TH6
TH7
TH32
LEV-A, LEV-B, LEV-C
DCL
CB
CY1,CY2
P.B.
U/V/W
S3 TB1
SW5-6 *2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
INDOOR
UNIT
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
POWER SUPPLY
~/N 230V 50Hz
1 2 3 4 5 6
*2. SW5 -1 to 5 : Function Switch
22
CY1
CY2
SYMBOL
TB7
CN5
CND
CN2M
SW1
SW11
SW12
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
NAME
Terminal Block<M-net connection>
Connector<Transmission>
Connector<Power Supply>
Connector<M-NET communication>
Switch<Status of communication>
Switch<Address setting : 1s digit>
Switch<Address setting : 10s digit>
LED<Power Supply : DC5V>
LED<Connection to Outdoor Unit>
LED<Transmission : Sending>
LED<Transmission : Recelving>
LED<Power Supply : DC12V>
PUHZ-RP100YKA PUHZ-RP125YKA PUHZ-RP140YKA
SYMBOL
TB1
TB2
MC
MF1, MF2
21S4
63H
TH3, TH33
TH4
TH6
TH7
TH32
LEV-A,LEV-B,LEV-C
ACL1~ACL4
CB1, CB2
CK
RS
P.B.
TB-U/V/W
TB-L1/L2/L3
NAME
Terminal Block<Power Supply >
Terminal Block<Indoor/Outdoor >
Motor for Compressor
Fan Motor
Solenoid Valve (Four-Way Valve)
High Pressure Switch
Thermistor<Outdoor Pipe>
Thermistor<Discharge>
Thermistor<Outdoor 2-Phase Pipe>
Thermistor<Outdoor>
Thermistor<Shell>
Electronic Expansion Valve
Reactor
Main Smoothing Capacitor
Capacitor
Rush Current Protect Resistor
Power Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<U/V/W-Phase>
Connection Terminal<L1/L2/L3-Power Supply>
SYMBOL
TB-P2
TB-C1
TB-N1
X52A
N.F.
LI1/LI2/LI3/NI
LO1/LO2/LO3/NO
GD1, GD3
CONV.B.
L1-A1/IN
L1-A2/OU
L2-A2/OU
L3-A2/OU
N-IN
CK-OU
C.B.
SW1
NAME
Connection Terminal
Connection Terminal
Connection Terminal
52C Relay
Noise Filter Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<L1/L2/L3/N-Power Supply>
Connection Terminal<L1/L2/L3/N-Power Supply>
Connection Terminal<Ground>
Converter Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<L1-Power Supply>
Connection Terminal<L1-Power Supply>
Connection Terminal<L2-Power Supply>
Connection Terminal<L3-Power Supply>
Connection Terminal
Connection Terminal
Controller Circuit Board
Switch<Forced Defrost, Defect History Record
Reset, Refrigerant Adress>
Switch<Test Operation>
SW4
SYMBOL
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
SWP
CN31
LED1,LED2
F1~F4
CNM
CNMNT
CNVMNT
CNDM
CN3S
CN51
X51,X52
NAME
Switch<Function Switch>
Switch<Model Select>
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch
Switch<Pump Down>
Connector<Emergency Operation>
LED<Operatiion Inspection Indicators>
FUSE<T6.3AL250V>
Connector<A-Control Service Inspection Kit>
Connector
<Connect to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
<Connect to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
< Connection for Option(Contact Input)>
Connector< Connection for Option>
Connector< Connection for Option>
Relay
RP140 only
LEV-C
5
1 3 1
5
CNVMNT CNMNT
(WHT) (WHT)
1
LEV-C 6
(BLU)
1
14
CNM
(WHT)
CN4
(WHT)
1 2
CN2
(WHT) 7
2
F1
1
F4
3
BLK
X51
1 21S4
(GRN)
3 4
BLU
CNS
(WHT)
3
F3
CNAC
(WHT)
1 2
X52
F2
3
M-NET ADAPTER
2
1
CN31
CN51
(WHT)
7
3
1
3
1
3
A B S
5
TB7
M-NET
1
*1. MODEL SELECT
MODEL
ON
125Y OFF
7
--
X52A
V MS
U 3~
ON
140Y OFF
TB-L3
BLK
TB-L2
WHT
TB-L1
RED
RS
+
+
CB1
+
CB2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
3
1
CK
CONV.B.
L1-IN
2
2 1
ACL1
TB1
L1
POWER SUPPLY
3N~
400V 50Hz
L2
L3
N
RED
LI1
WHT
LI2 U
BLK
BLU
LI3
NI
LO1
RED
U
LO2
WHT
U
LO3
BLK
U
NO
BLU
GRN/YLW
CNDC
(PNK)
2
1
3
3
M-NET ADAPTER
TB7
CN5
CND
CN2M
SW1
SW11
Terminal Block<M-NET connection >
Connector<Transmission>
Connector<Power Supply>
Connector<M-NET communication>
Switch<Status of communication>
Switch<Address setting: 1s digit>
SW12
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
Switch<Address setting. 10s digit >
LED<Power Supply: DC5V>
LED<Connection to Outdoor Unit>
LED<Transmission: Sending>
LED<Transmission: Receiving>
LED<Power Supply: DC12V>
23
U -1 CNL
(BLU)
WHT
BLK
BLK
GD3
BRN
GD1
ACL2
+
+
U
BLU
CNAC2
3 (RED)
RED
CNCT
(RED) 1
3
RED
N.F.
CNAC1
(WHT) 1
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1-A1
+
TB-N1
TB-C1
WHT
TB-P2
BLK
RED
ON
OFF
*2. SW5 -1 to 5 : Function Switch
RED
TB-U
+
W MC
WHT
L3-A2 WHT
--
BLK
SW5-6 *2
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CN7
(WHT)
TB-W
+
TB-V
RED
S3
RED
ORN
S2
INDOOR
UNIT
2 CN5
1 (RED)
CN2
(WHT)
BRN
S1
2 CN4
1 (WHT)
2
YLW
TB2
2
1
BLK
1 3
CN7
(WHT)
SW6
ON
100Y OFF
7
L3-OU BLK
3
CND
(WHT)
3 1
1 SS
(WHT)
21S4
P.B.
SW12
LED3
LED4
L1-A2
1
CNDC
(PNK)
SW11
SW1
LED2
BLK CK-OU
1
5
6
LEV-B
(RED)
RED
TRANS
1
L2-A2
3
6
L1-OU RED
1
63H
(YLW)
LEV-A
(WHT)
1
N-IN
CNF2
(WHT)
1
SW6
1 2 21
TH3 TH4
(WHT) (WHT)
SW1
1
4
TH7/6
(RED)
SW5
1 3 1 2
TH33 TH32
(YLW) (BLK)
5
*1
LED5 CN2M
(WHT)
LED1
5
t°
*1
3
2
5
CNDM CN3S
(WHT) (WHT)
7
MS
3~
When M-NET adapter is connected
3
SW4 SWP SW8
1
MF2
t°
M
LED1
MS
3~
t° t°
LED2
1
MF1
t°
M
L2-OU WHT
t°
CNF1
7 (WHT)
LEV-B
M
SW7
C.B.
LEV-A
SW9
TH33 TH32 TH7 TH6 TH3 TH4
CN5
(WHT)
63H
ACL4
ACL3
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
PUHZ-RP200YKA PUHZ-RP250YKA
SYMBOL
TB1
TB2
MC
MF1,MF2
21S4
63H,63H1,63H2
TH3
TH4
TH6
TH7
TH32
LEV-A,LEV-B
ACL4
DCL
CB1,CB2
RS
FUSE1, FUSE2
CY1,CY2
NAME
Terminal Block<Power Supply>
Terminal Block<Indoor/Outdoor>
Motor for Compressor
Fan Motor
Solenoid Valve (Four-Way Valve)
High Pressure Switch
Thermistor<Outdoor Pipe>
Thermistor<Discharge>
Thermistor<Outdoor 2-Phase Pipe>
Thermistor<Outdoor>
Thermistor<Shell>
Electronic Expansion Valve
Reactor
Reactor
Main Smoothing Capacitor
Rush Current Protect Resistor
Fuse<T15AL250V>
Capacitor
SYMBOL
P.B.
SC-U/V/W
TB-L1/L2/L3
TB-P1
TB-P2
TB-C1
TB-N1
X52A
N.F.
LI1/ LI2/LI3/NI
LO1/ LO2/LO3
GD1,GD2
C.B.
SW1
NAME
Power Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<U/V/W-Phase>
Connection Terminal<L1/L2/L3-Power supply>
Connection Terminal
Connection Terminal
Connection Terminal
Connection Terminal
52C Relay
Noise Filter Circuit Board
Connection Terminal<L1/L2/L3/NI-Power supply>
Connection Terminal<L1/L2/L3-Power supply>
Connection Terminal<Ground>
Controller Circuit Board
Switch<Forced Defrost, Defect History Record
Reset, Refrigerant Address>
Switch<Test Operation>
Switch<Function Switch>
Switch<Model Select>
SW4
SW5
SW6
SYMBOL
SW7
SW8
SW9
SWP
CN31
LED1,LED2
F3,F4
SS
CNM
CNMNT
CNVMNT
CNDM
CN3S
CN51
X51,X52
NAME
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch<Function Setup>
Switch
Switch<Pump Down>
Connector<Emergency Operation>
LED<Operation Inspection Indicators>
Fuse< T6.3AL250V>
Connector<Connection for Option>
Connector<A-Control Service Inspection Kit>
Connector
<Connected to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
<Connected to Optional M-NET Adapter Board>
Connector
< Connected for Option (Contact Input)>
Connector<Connection for Option>
Connector<Connection for Option>
Relay
*3.
*3.
For RP200 For RP250
63H2
5
5
6
1 3 1
5
CNVMNT CNMNT
(WHT)
(WHT)
1
TRANS
2
1
1
14
CNM
(WHT)
2
CNDC
(PNK)
CNS
(WHT)
1
FUSE1
1 21S4
(GRN)
4
FUSE2 RED
WHT
3
X51
X52
3
F4
3
3
1
SW12
LED3
LED4
M-NET ADAPTER
2
1
CN51
(WHT)
7
F3
CNAC
(WHT)
1
2
LED2
CN31
CN4
(WHT)
1 2
7
1
*1
CNDM CN3S
(WHT) (WHT)
CN2
(WHT)
3
LED2
1 3
63H
(YLW)
SW11
SW1
LED1
LEV-B
(RED)
SW7
1
SW5
6
LEV-A
(WHT)
SW6
1
1 2 1
4 12 21
TH32 TH7/6 TH3 TH4
(BLK) (RED) (WHT) (WHT)
CNF2
7 (WHT)
MS
3~
CN5
(WHT)
t°
*1
CNF1
7 (WHT)
1
t°
5
SW1
MF2
t°
When M-NET adapter is connected
3
SW4 SWP SW8
1
MS
3~
t°
M
LED1
MF1
t°
LEV-B
M
SW9
C. B.
LEV-A
63H1
LED5 CN2M
(WHT)
63H
TH32 TH7 TH6 TH3 TH4
CND
(WHT)
3 1
1
3
3
1
3
A B S
TB7
1
M-NET
5
SS
(WHT)
21S4
P. B.
7
RED
WHT
7
CN2
(WHT)
1
2
2 CN4
1 (WHT)
2 CN5
1 (RED)
CY2
BLK
BLK
SC-V
WHT
SC-U
RED
TB-L3
BLK
TB-L2
WHT
TB-L1
RED
MC
W
V MS
3~
U
X52A
RS
CY1
2
SC-W
BLK
S3
TB-P2
TB-C1
TB-N1
BLK
RED
DCL
BRN
S2
INDOOR
UNIT
RED TB-P1
ORN
S1
WHT
YLW
TB2
CB1
CB2
2
N. F.
CNAC1
(WHT) 1
CNCT
(RED) 1
3
2 1
CNAC2
3 (RED)
TB1
RED
LI 1
WHT
LI 2
L3
BLK
LI 3
U
N
BLU
NI
U
L1
POWER
SUPPLY
3N~
400V 50Hz
L2
U
U
LO 1
RED
LO 2
WHT
LO3
BLK
*1 MODEL SELECT
MODEL
GRN/YLW
ON
200Y OFF
U
U
SYMBOL
TB7
CN5
CND
CN2M
SW1
SW11
SW12
LED1
LED2
LED3
LED4
LED5
2
3
3
1 CNL
(BLU)
WHT
CNDC 1
(PNK)
WHT
GD2
BLK
M-NET ADAPTER
BLK
GD1
ACL4
ON
250Y OFF
SW6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
*2. SW5 -1 to 5 : Function Switch
NAME
Terminal Block(M-NET connection)
Connector<Transmission>
Connector<Power Supply>
Connector<M-NET communication>
Switch<Status of communication>
Switch<Address setting:1s digit>
Switch<Address setting:10s digit>
LED<Power Supply:DC5V>
LED<Connection to Outdoor Unit>
LED<Transmission:Sending>
LED<Transmission:Receiving>
LED<Power Supply:DC12V>
24
SW5-6 *2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
8
WIRING SPECIFICATIONS
8-1. FIELD ELECTRICAL WIRING (power wiring specifications)
Outdoor unit model
RP35, 50V
Outdoor unit power supply
Circuit rating
Wiring
Wire No. ×
size (mm2)
Outdoor unit input capacity Main switch (Breaker)
Outdoor unit power supply
RP60, 70V
RP140V
RP100,125V
~/N (single), 50 Hz, ~/N (single), 50 Hz, ~/N (single), 50 Hz, ~/N (single), 50 Hz,
230 V
230 V
230 V
230 V
*1
16 A
25 A
32 A
40 A
3 × Min. 1.5
3 × Min. 2.5
3 × Min. 4
3 × Min. 6
RP100, 125, 140Y
RP200, 250
3N~ (3 ph 4-wires),
50 Hz, 400 V
16 A
5 × Min. 1.5
3N~ (3 ph 4-wires),
50 Hz, 400 V
32 A
5 × Min. 4
Cable length 50m:3×4 (Polar)/
Cable length 80m:3×6 (Polar)
1 × Min. 2.5
2 × 0.3 (Non-polar)
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit
*2
3 × 1.5 (Polar)
3 × 1.5 (Polar)
3 × 1.5 (Polar)
3 × 1.5 (Polar)
3 × 1.5 (Polar)
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit earth
Remote controller-Indoor unit
Outdoor unit L-N (single)
Outdoor unit L1-N, L2-N, L3-N (3 phase)
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit S1-S2
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit S2-S3
Remote controller-Indoor unit
*2
*3
1 × Min. 1.5
2 × 0.3 (Non-polar)
1 × Min. 1.5
2 × 0.3 (Non-polar)
1 × Min. 1.5
2 × 0.3 (Non-polar)
1 × Min. 1.5
2 × 0.3 (Non-polar)
1 × Min. 1.5
2 × 0.3 (Non-polar)
*4
AC 230 V
AC 230 V
AC 230 V
AC 230 V
AC 230 V
AC 230 V
*4
*4
*4
AC 230 V
DC 24 V
DC 12 V
AC 230 V
DC 24 V
DC 12 V
AC 230 V
DC 24 V
DC 12 V
AC 230 V
DC 24 V
DC 12 V
AC 230 V
DC 24 V
DC 12 V
AC 230 V
DC 24 V
DC 12 V
*1. A breaker with at least 3.0 mm contact separation in each poles shall be provided. Use earth leakage breaker (NV).
*2. (RP35-140)
Max. 45 m
If 2.5 mm2 used, Max. 50 m
If 2.5 mm2 used and S3 separated, Max. 80 m
(RP200, 250)
Max. 80 m Total Max. including all indoor/indoor connection is 80 m.
• Use one cable for S1 and S2 and another for S3 as shown in the picture.
• Max. 50 m Total Max. for PEA. Wiring size 3 × 1.5 (Polar).
*3. The 10 m wire is attached in the remote controller accessory.
*4. The figures are NOT always against the ground.
S3 terminal has DC 24 V against S2 terminal. However between S3 and S1, these terminals are NOT electrically insulataed by the transformer or other device.
Caution: Be sure to install N-Line. without N-Line, it could cause damage to unit
Notes: 1. Wiring size must comply with the applicable local and national code..
2. Power supply cables and Indoor/Outdoor unit connecting cables shall not be lighter than polychloroprene sheathed flexible cable.
(Design 60245 IEC 57)
3. Install an earth longer than other cables.
Power supply
Isolator
3 poles isolator
S1
S1
A-Control S2
Outdoor Unit
S2
S3
S3
A-Control
Indoor Unit
Warning:
In case of A-control wiring, there is high voltage potential on the S3 terminal caused by electrical circuit design that has no electrical insulation between
power line and communication signal line. Therefore, please turn off the main power supply when servicing. And do not touch the S1, S2, S3 terminals
when the power is energized. If isolator should be used between indoor unit and outdoor unit, please use 3-pole type.
1:1 system
Electrical wiring
Synchronized twin and triple system Electrical wiring
• Synchronized twin
Outdoor
unit
Unit
power
supply
Earth leakage breaker
wiring circuit breaker or
isolating switch
L
N
S1
S2
S3
Indoor/outdoor
unit connection
cable
Outdoor
unit
Indoor
unit
1
2
Remote
controller
Unit
power
supply
S1
S2
S3
Earth leakage breaker
wiring circuit breaker or
isolating switch
L
N
S1
S2
S3
Indoor/outdoor
unit connection
cable
Indoor
unit
1
2
Indoor
unit
1
2
Remote
controller
S1
S2
S3
S1
S2
S3
• Synchronized triple
Outdoor
unit
Unit
power
supply
Earth leakage breaker
wiring circuit breaker or
isolating switch
25
Indoor
unit
1
2
L
N
S1
S2
S3
Indoor/outdoor
connection cable
S1
S2
S3
Remote
controller
Indoor
unit
Indoor
unit
1
2
1
2
S1
S2
S3
S1
S2
S3
1:1 System (Indoor : PEA-200, 250)
Outdoor
unit
Unit
power
supply
Earth leakage breaker
wiring circuit breaker or
isolating switch
L1
L2
L3
N
1:2 System (Indoor : PEA-400, 500)
Indoor
unit
Indoor/outdoor
unit connection
cable
S1
S2
S3
Outdoor
unit No.1
L1
L2
L3
N
S1
S2
S3
1
2
Unit
power
supply
Unit
power
supply
L1
L2
L3
N
S1
S2
S3
Earth leakage breaker
wiring circuit breaker or
Remote
controller
isolating switch
Unit
power
supply
Indoor
unit
Indoor/outdoor
unit connection
cable
L1
L2
L3
N
S1
S2
S3
Unit
power
supply
S1
S2
S3
TB4-1
Outdoor
unit No.2
L1
L2
L3
N
1
2
Indoor/outdoor
unit connection
cable
Remote
controller
TB4-2
S1
S2
S3
8-2. SEPARATE INDOOR UNIT/ OUTDOOR UNIT POWER SUPPLIES
The following connection patterns are available.
The outdoor unit power supply patterns vary on models.
1:1 System
Outdoor unit power supply
Earth leakage breaker
Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit/outdoor unit connecting cords
Remote controller
Indoor unit
Option
Indoor unit power supply
<For models without heater>
* The optional indoor power supply terminal kit is required.
L
N
S1
S2
S3
L
N
S1
S2
S3
1
2
* Affix a label B that is included with the manuals near each wiring diagram for the indoor and outdoor units.
Simultaneous twin/triple system
<For models without heater>
* The optional indoor power supply terminal kit is required.
L
N
L
L
L
L
N
N
N
N
S1
S1
S1
S2
S2
S2
S3
S3
S3
S3
S3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
S1
S2
S1
S2
Outdoor unit power supply
Earth leakage breaker
Wiring circuit breaker or isolating switch
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit/outdoor unit connecting cales
Remote controller
Indoor unit
Option
Indoor unit power supply
Indoor unit earth
* Affix a label B that is included with the manuals near each wiring diagram for the indoor and outdoor units.
If the indoor and outdoor units have separate power supplies, refer to the table below.
If the optional indoor power supply terminal kit is used, change the indoor unit
electrical box wiring referring to the figure in the right and the DIP switch settings of the
Electric heater
outdoor unit control board.
(For models with
heater)
L
N
Required
ORANGE
CND
Indoor unit
control board
Indoor unit power supplied from outdoor unit
(when shipped from factory)
Electric heater
(For models with
heater)
L
N
Connectors
CND
S1
S2
S3
* There are 3 types of labels (labels A, B, and C). Affix the appropriate labels to
the units according to the wiring method.
If the indoor and
outdoor units have
separate power
supplies, change the
connections of the
connectors as shown
in the following
figure.
BLUE YELLOW
YELLOW BLUE
3
ON
OFF
1 2
(SW8)
Set the SW8-3 to ON.
S1
S2
S3
CND
Required
BLUE YELLOW
BLUE YELLOW
Indoor power supply terminal kit (option)
Indoor unit electrical box connector connection change
Label affixed near each wiring diagram
for the indoor and outdoor units
Outdoor unit DIP switch settings (when
using separate indoor unit/outdoor unit
power supplies only)
Indoor unit specifications
Required
Connectors (connections when shipped
from the factory are for indoor unit power
supplied from outdoor unit)
ORANGE
CND
Indoor unit
control board
Separate indoor unit/outdoor unit power
supplies
26
Indoor unit model
Indoor unit power supply
Indoor unit input capacity
Main switch (Breaker)
Indoor unit power supply
Indoor unit power supply earth
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit earth
Remote controller-Indoor unit
RP35~140
~/N (single), 50 Hz, 230 V
16 A
*1
Circuit
rating
Wiring
Wire No. % size
(mm2)
2 % Min. 1.5
1 % Min. 1.5
2 % Min. 0.3
*2
–
2 % 0.3 (Non-polar)
*3
Indoor unit L-N
*4
AC 230 V
–
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit S1-S2
*4
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit S2-S3
*4
DC24 V
Remote controller-Indoor unit
*4
DC12 V
*1. A breaker with at least 3 mm contact separation in each pole shall be provided. Use earth leakage breaker (NV).
The breaker shall be provided to ensure disconnection of all active phase conductor of the supply.
*2. Max. 120 m
*3.The 10 m wire is attached in the remote controller accessory. Max. 500 m
*4.The figures are NOT always against the ground.
Notes: 1. Wiring size must comply with the applicable local and national code.
2. Power supply cables and indoor unit/outdoor unit connecting cables shall not be lighter than polychloroprene sheathed
flexible cable. (Design 60245 IEC 57)
3. Install an earth longer than other cables.
8-3. INDOOR – OUTDOOR CONNECTING CABLE
The cable shall not be lighter than design 60245 IEC or 60227 IEC.
Wire No. % Size ($)
Outdoor power supply
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit earth
Max. 45m
Max. 50m
Max. 80m
3 % 1.5 (polar)
3 % 2.5 (polar)
3 % 2.5 (polar) and S3 separated
1 % Min. 1.5
1 % Min. 2.5
1 % Min. 2.5
+ The Max. cable length may vary depending on the condition of installation, humidity or materials, etc.
Indoor/Outdoor separate
power supply
Wire No. % Size ($)
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit
2 % Min. 0.3
Max. 120m
Indoor unit-Outdoor unit earth
—
+ The optional indoor power supply terminal kit is necessary
Be sure to connect the indoor-outdoor connecting cables directly to the units (no intermediate connections).
Intermediate connections can lead to communication errors if water enters the cables and causes insufficient
insulation to ground or a poor electrical contact at the intermediate connection point.
For PUHZ-RP200/250YKA
Cross section of cable
Round
Flat
Flat
Round
Wire size (mm2)
Number of wires
2.5
3
2.5
3
1.5
4
2.5
4
Polarity
Clockwise : S1-S2-S3
*Pay attention to stripe of yellow and green
Not applicable
(Because center wire has no cover finish)
L (m)*6
(30)
*2
Not applicable
*5
From left to right : S1-Open-S2-S3
(18)
*3
Clockwise : S1-S2-S3-Open
*Connect S1 nad S3 to the opposite angle
(30)
*4
*1 :Power supply cords of appliances shall not be lighter than design 60245 IEC or
(3C Flat cable × 2)
227 IEC.
*2 :In case that cable with stripe of yellow and green is available.
S1 S2 S3
*3 :In case of regular polarity connection (S1-S2-S3), wire size is 1.5 mm2.
*4 :In case of regular polarity connection (S1-S2-S3).
*6 :Mentioned cable length is just a reference value.
*5 :In the flat cables are connected as this picture, they can be used up to 30 m.
It may be different depending on the condition of installation, humidity or
materials, etc.
27
8-4. M-NET WIRING METHOD
(Points to notice)
(1) Outside the unit, transmission wires should stay away from electric wires in order to prevent electromagnetic noise from
making an influence on the signal communication. Place them at intervals of more than 5cm. Do not put them in the same
conduit tube.
(2) Terminal block (TB7) for transmission wires should never be connected to 220~240V power supply. If it is connected,
electronic parts on M-NET P.C. board may burn out.
(3) Use 2-core x 1.25mm2 shield wire (CVVS, CPEVS) for the transmission wire. Transmission signals may not be sent or
received normally if different types of transmission wires are put together in the same multi-conductor cable. Never do this
because this may cause a malfunction.
Group
remote
controller
Power
supply
unit for
transmission
wire
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 02
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 01
A-control
A-control
remote
remote
controller
controller
It would be ok if M-NET wire (non-polar, 2-cores) is arranged in addition to the
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 03
A-control
remote
controller
wiring for A-control.
(4) Earth only one of any appliances through M-NET transmission wire (shield wire). Communication error may occur due to
the influence of electromagnetic noise.
“Ed” error will appear on the LED display of outdoor unit.
“0403” error will appear on the central-control remote controller.
× Bad example (Multi spot earthing of shield wire)
Central
remote
controller
Power
supply
appliance
M-NET type
outdoor unit
M-NET type
outdoor unit
M-NET type
outdoor unit
M-NET transmission wire
Good example 1 (Single spot earthing of shield wire)
Central
remote
controller
Power
supply
appliance
M-NET type
outdoor unit
M-NET type
outdoor unit
M-NET type
outdoor unit
M-NET transmission wire
Good example 2 (Single spot earthing of shield wire)
Central
remote
controller
Power
supply
appliance
M-NET type
outdoor unit
M-NET type
outdoor unit
M-NET type
outdoor unit
M-NET transmission wire
If there are more than 2 earthing spots on the shield wire, noise may enter into the shield wire because the earth wire and
shield wire form 1 circuit and the electric potential difference occurs due to the impedance difference among earthing spots.
In case of single spot earthing, noise does not enter into the shield wire because the earth wire and shield wire do not form
1 circuit.
To avoid communication errors caused by noise, make sure to observe the single spot earthing method described in the
installation manual.
28
M-NET wiring
(1) Use 2-core x 1.25mm2 shield wire for electric wires.
M-NET
terminal
(Excluding the case connecting to system controller.)
Earth
block
wire
(2) Connect the wire to the M-NET terminal block. Connect one core of the
transmission wire (non-polar) to A terminal and the other to B. Peel the
A B S
shield wire, twist the shield part to a string and connect it to S terminal.
Transmission
Shield
(3) In the system which several outdoor units are being connected, the terminal
wire part
(A, B, S) on M-NET terminal block should be individually wired to the other
outdoor unit’s terminal, i.e. A to A, B to B and S to S. In this case, choose one of those outdoor units and drive a screw
to fix an earth wire on the plate as shown on the right figure.
8-4-1. M-NET address setting
In A-control models, M-NET address and refrigerant address should be set only for the outdoor unit. Similar to CITY MULTI
system, there is no need to set the address of outdoor unit and remote controller. To construct a central control system, the
setting of M-NET address should be conducted only upon the outdoor unit. The setting range should be 1 to 50 (the same as
that of the indoor unit in CITY MULTI system), and the address number should be consecutively set in a same group.
901
9 01
9 01
78
9 01
23
456
78
78
9 01
~
23
456
23
78
90 1
23
456
50
23
456
tens
digit
2
23
456
setting SW12
1
456
SW11
ones
Switng digit
78
<Setting example> M-NET Address No.
Address number can be set by using rotary switches
(SW11 for 1s digit and SW12 for 10s digit), which
is located on the M-NET board of outdoor unit.
(Initial setting: all addresses are set to “0”.)
78
8-4-2. Refrigerant address setting
In case of multiple grouping system (multiple refrigerant circuits in 1 group), indoor units should be connected by remote
controller wiring (TB5) and the refrigerant address needs to be set. Leave the refrigerant addresses to “00” if the group setting is not conducted. Set the refrigerant address by using DIP SW1-3 to -6 on the outdoor controller board. [Initial setting: all
switches are OFF. (All refrigerant addresses are “00”.)]
ON
ON
OFF
Refrigerant
address
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
1
9
8
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
10
11
12
1 2 3 4 5 6
6
7
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
5
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
4
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
3
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
13
14
1 2 3 4 5 6
15
8-4-3. Regulations in address settings
In case of multiple grouping system, M-NET and refrigerant address settings should be done as explained in the above section. Set the lowest number in the group for the outdoor unit whose refrigerant address is “00” as its M-NET address.
Group A
System
controller
Power
supply
unit for
transmission
wire
Group B
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 01
Group C
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 02
Refrigerant
address 01
M-NET
address 03
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 04
TB5
A-control
remote
controller
A-control
remote
controller
A-control
remote
controller
w Refrigerant addresses can be overlapped if they are in the different group.
Group A
System
controller
Power
supply
unit for
transmission
wire
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 01
Group B
Refrigerant
address 01
M-NET
address 02
Refrigerant
address 00
M-NET
address 04
Refrigerant
address 01
M-NET
address 03
Refrigerant
address 02
M-NET
address 05
TB5
A-control
remote
controller
A-control
remote
controller
w In group B, M-NET address of the outdoor unit whose refrigerant address is “00” is not set to the minimum in the group.
As “3” is right for this situation, the setting is wrong. Taking group A as a good sample, set the minimum M-NET address in
the group for the outdoor unit whose refrigerant address is “00”.
29
9
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DIAGRAM
unit : mm(inch)
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
Heat exchanger
Stop valve
(with service port)
Refrigerant GAS pipe
connection(1/2F)
Thermistor TH6
(Outdoor 2-phase pipe)
Charge plug
Solenoid valve
(Four-way valve)
Thermistor TH7
(Outdoor)
Strainer
#50
Thermistor TH3
(Outdoor pipe)
Muffler
Distributor
High pressure
switch 63H
Thermistor TH4
(Discharge)
Thermistor TH32
(Shell)
Linear
expansion valve B
Muffler
Power
receiver
Stop valve
Refrigerant LIQUID pipe
connection(1/4F)
Thermistor TH33
(Outdoor pipe)
Compressor
Linear expansion valve A
Strainer
#100
Strainer
#100
Refrigerant flow in cooling
Refrigerant flow in heating
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
Heat exchanger
Stop valve
(with service port)
Refrigerant GAS pipe
connection :15.88(5/8)
4-way valve
Strainer
#50
Muffler
Charge plug
(Low pressure)
Charge plug
(Higt pressure)
Thermistor TH7
(Outdoor)
Thermistor TH6
(Outdoor 2-phase pipe)
Thermistor TH3
(Outdoor pipe)
High pressure
switch 63H
Distributor
Thermistor TH4
(Discharge)
Strainer
#100
Linear
expansion valve B
Stop valve
(with service port)
Refrigerant LIQUID pipe
connection :9.52(3/8)
Thermistor TH32
(Shell)
Power
receiver
Strainer
#100
Compressor
Linear expansion valve A
Strainer
#100
Strainer
#100
30
Thermistor TH33
(Outdoor pipe)
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
unit : mm(inch)
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
Heat exchanger
Ball valve
4-way valve
Strainer
#50
Refrigerant GAS pipe
connection(5/8)
Muffler
Charge plug
(Low pressure)
Thermistor TH7
(Outdoor)
Thermistor TH6
(Outdoor 2-phase pipe)
Charge plug
(Higt pressure)
Thermistor TH3
(Outdoor pipe)
Distributor
High pressure
switch 63H
Strainer
#100
Thermistor TH4
(Discharge)
Strainer
#100
Linear
expansion valve B
Stop valve
(with service port)
Refrigerant LIQUID pipe
connection(3/8)
Thermistor TH32
(Shell)
Power
receiver
Strainer
#100
Thermistor TH33
(Outdoor pipe)
Compressor
Linear expansion valve A
Strainer
#100
Strainer
#100
Refrigerant flow in cooling
Refrigerant flow in heating
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
Heat exchanger
Ball valve
Refrigerant GAS pipe
connection :15.88(5/8)
4-way valve
Strainer #50
Muffler
Charge plug
(Low pressure)
Charge plug
(Higt pressure)
Stop valve
(with service port)
Refrigerant LIQUID
pipe connection
:9.52(3/8)
Strainer
#100
Distributor
Thermistor TH4
(Discharge)
Strainer
#100
Linear
expansion
valve B
Thermistor TH3
(Outdoor pipe)
High pressure
switch 63H
Strainer
#100
Thermistor TH7
(Outdoor)
Thermistor TH6
(Outdoor 2-phase pipe)
Thermistor TH32
(Shell)
Power
receiver
Heat interchange
circuit
Strainer
#100
Thermistor
TH33
(Outdoor pipe)
Compressor
Linear expansion valve A
Strainer
#100
Linear
expansion
valve C
31
unit : mm(inch)
PUHZ-RP200YKA
Heat exchanger
Ball valve
Thermistor TH6
(Outdoor 2-phase pipe)
4-way valve
Strainer
#50
Refrigerant GAS pipe
connection :25.4(1)
Muffler
Charge plug
(Low pressure)
Charge plug
(Higt pressure)
Refrigerant LIQUID pipe
connection :9.52(3/8)
Distributor
Thermistor TH4
(Discharge)
Strainer
#100
Stop valve
(with service port)
Thermistor TH3
(Outdoor pipe)
High pressure
switch 63H
Strainer
#100
Linear
expansion valve B
Thermistor TH7
(Outdoor)
Thermistor TH32
(Shell)
Strainer
#100
Power
receiver
Compressor
Linear expansion valve A
Strainer
#100
Strainer
#100
PUHZ-RP250YKA
Refrigerant flow in cooling
Refrigerant flow in heating
Ball valve
Heat exchanger
High pressure
switch(63H2)
Refrigerant GAS pipe
:25.4(:1 inch)
Thermistor (TH6)
4-way valve
Strainer
(#50)
Muffler
Service
port
(check)
Thermistor (TH32)
Strainer (Shell)
(#100)
Stop valve
(with service port)
Refrigerant LIQUID pipe
:12.7(:1/2 inch)
Service
port
(check)
Power
receiver
Thermistor (TH3)
High pressure
switch (63H1)
Thermistor (TH4)
(Discharge)
Strainer
(#100)
Strainer
(#100)
Linear
expansion valve B
Thermistor (TH7)
Compressor
Linear expansion valve A
Strainer
(#100)
Strainer
(#100)
32
Distributor
9-1. Refrigerant recovering (pump down)
Perform the following procedures to recover the refrigerant when moving the indoor unit or the outdoor unit.
Turn on the power supply (circuit breaker).
When power is supplied, make sure that “CENTRALLY CONTROLLED” is not displayed on the remote controller. If
“CENTRALLY CONTROLLED” is displayed, the refrigerant recovering (pump down) cannot be completed normally.
After the gas stop valve is closed, set the SWP switch on the control board of the outdoor unit to ON. The compressor (outdoor
unit) and fans (indoor and outdoor units) start operating and refrigerant recovering operation begins. LED1 and LED2 on the
control board of the outdoor unit are lit.
Set the SWP switch (push-button type) to ON in order to perform refrigerant recovering operation only when the unit is
stopped. However, refrigerant recovering operation cannot be performed until compressor stops even if the unit is stopped.
Wait 3 minutes until compressor stops and set the SWP switch to ON again.
Because the unit automatically stops in about 2 to 3 minutes after the refrigerant recovering operation (LED1 and LED2 are
lit), be sure to quickly close the gas stop valve.
In case the outdoor unit is stopped when LED1 and LED2 are lit, open the liquid stop valve completely, and then repeat step
2 3 minutes later.
If the refrigerant recovering operation has been completed normally (LED1 and LED2 are lit), the unit will remain stopped
until the power supply is turned off.
Turn off the power supply (circuit breaker.)
* Note that when the length of the extension piping is long, it may not be possible to perform a pump-down operation. When
performing the pump-down operation, make sure that the low pressure is lowered to near 0 MPa (gauge).
9-2. Start and finish of test run
• Operation from the indoor unit
Execute the test run using the installation manual for the indoor unit.
• Operation from the outdoor unit
By using the DIP switch SW4 on the control board of outdoor unit, test run can be started and finished, and its operation
mode (cooling/heating) can be set up.
<SW4>
1Set the operation mode (cooling/heating) using SW4-2.
2Turn on SW4-1 to start test run with the operation mode set by SW4-2.
3Turn off SW4-1 to finish the test run.
ON
OFF
• There may be a faint knocking sound around the machine room after power is supplied, but this is
1
2
no problem with product because the linear expansion pipe is just moving to adjust opening pulse.
• There may be a knocking sound around the machine room for several seconds after compressor
Operation
starts operating, but this is no problem with product because the check valve itself, generates the Stop
Cooling Heating
sound because pressure difference is small in the refrigerant circuit.
Note:
The operation mode cannot be changed by SW4-2 during test run. (To change test run mode, stop the unit by SW4-1,
change the operation mode and restart the test run by SW4-1.)
33
10
TROUBLESHOOTING
10-1. TROUBLESHOOTING
<Error code display by self-diagnosis and actions to be taken for service (summary)>
Present and past error codes are logged and displayed on the wired remote controller and control board of outdoor unit.
Actions to be taken for service, which depends on whether or not the trouble is reoccurring at service, are summarized in the
table below. Check the contents below before investigating details.
Unit conditions at service
Error code
Actions to be taken for service (summary)
Displayed
Judge what is wrong and take a corrective action according
to “10-4. Self-diagnosis action table”.
The trouble is reoccurring.
Not displayed
Logged
Conduct trouble shooting and ascertain the cause of the
trouble according to “10-5. Troubleshooting
by inferior phenomena”.
Consider the temporary defects such as the work of
protection devices in the refrigerant circuit including
compressor, poor connection of wiring, noise and etc.
Re-check the symptom, and check the installation
environment, refrigerant amount, weather when the
trouble occurred, matters related to wiring
and etc.
Reset error code logs and restart the unit after finishing
service.
There is no abnormality in electrical component,
controller board, remote controller and etc.
The trouble is not reoccurring.
Not logged
Re-check the abnormal symptom.
Conduct trouble shooting and ascertain the cause of the
trouble according to “10-5. Troubleshooting
by inferior phenomena”.
Continue to operate unit for the time being if the cause
is not ascertained.
There is no abnormality concerning of parts such as
electrical component, controller board, remote controller
and etc.
10-2. CHECK POINT UNDER TEST RUN
(1) Before test run
• After installation of indoor and outdoor units, piping work and electric wiring work, re-check that there is no refrigerant leakage, loosened connections and incorrect polarity.
• Measure impedance between the ground and the power supply terminal block (L, N) on the outdoor unit by 500V Megger
and check that it is 1.0M" or over.
Do not use 500V Megger to indoor/outdoor connecting wire terminal block (S1, S2, S3) and remote controller terminal block
(1, 2). This may cause malfunction.
• Make sure that test run switch (SW4) is set to OFF before turning on power supply.
• Turn on power supply 12 hours before test run in order to protect compressor.
• For specific models which require higher ceiling settings or auto-recovery feature from power failure, make proper changes of
settings referring to the description of “11. FUNCTION SETTING”.
Make sure to read operation manual before test run. (Especially items to secure safety.)
34
"TEST RUN" and the currently selected
operation mode are displayed altemately.
Displays the remaining
test run time.
Operating procedures
1. Turn on the main power supply.
While the room temperature display on the remote
controller is “PLEASE WAIT”, the remote controller is disabled.
Wait until “PLEASE WAIT” disappears before using remote controller.
“PLEASE WAIT” appears for about 2 minutes after power
supply is turned on. +1
2. Press TEST button twice.
The TEST RUN appears on the screen.
3. Press OPERATION SWITCH
button.
Cooling mode: Check if cool air blows and water is drained.
Heating mode: Check if warm air blows. (It takes a little
while until warm air blows.)
4. Press AIR DIRECTION button. Check for correct motion of auto-vanes.
5. Check the outdoor unit fan for
correct running.
[TEST] button
Pipe (liquid) temperature
The outdoor unit features automatic capacity control to
provide optimum fan speeds. Therefore, the fan keeps
running at a low speed to meet the current outside air
condition unless it exceeds its available maximum power.
Then, in actuality, the fan may stop or run in the reverse
direction depending on the outside air, but this does not
mean malfunction.
6. Press the ON/OFF button to reset the test run in progress.
7. Register the contact number.
• In case of test run, the OFF timer will be activated, and the test run will automatically stop after 2 hours.
• The room temperature display section shows the pipe temperature of indoor units during the test run.
• Check that all the indoor units are running properly in case of simultaneous twin and triple operation. Malfunctions may not
be displayed regardless of incorrect wiring.
w1 After turning on the power supply, the system will go into startup mode, “PLEASE WAIT” will blink on the display section of
the room temperature, and lamp(green) of the remote controller will blink.
As to INDOOR BOARD LED, LED1 will be lit up, LED2 will either be lit up in case the address is 0 or turned off in case the
address is not 0. LED3 will blink.
As to OUTDOOR BOARD LED, LED1(green) and LED2(red) will be lit up. (After the startup mode of the system finishes,
LED2(red) will be turned off.)
In case OUTDOOR BOARD LED is digital display,
— and —
will be displayed alternately every second.
• If one of the above operations doesn’t function correctly, the causes written below should be considered. Find causes from
the symptoms.
The below symptoms are under test run mode. “startup” in the table means the display status of w1 written above.
Symptoms in test run mode
OUTDOOR BOARD LED Display
Remote Controller Display
< > indicates digital display.
After “startup” is displayed, only
Remote controller displays “PLEASE
green lights up. <00>
WAIT”, and cannot be operated.
After “startup” is displayed,
green(once) and red(once) blink
After power is turned on, “PLEASE WAIT” alternately. <F1>
is displayed for 3 minutes, then error code
After “startup” is displayed,
is displayed.
green(once) and red(twice) blink
alternately. <F3, F5, F9>
After “startup” is displayed,
green(twice) and red(once) blink
No display appears even when remote
alternately. <EA. Eb>
controller operation switch is turned on.
After “startup” is displayed, only
(Operation lamp does not light up.)
green lights up. <00>
Display appears but soon disappears
even when remote controller is operated.
After “startup” is displayed, only
green lights up. <00>
Cause
• After power is turned on, “PLEASE WAIT” is displayed for 2
minutes during system startup. (Normal)
• Incorrect connection of outdoor terminal block (L1, L2, L3 and
S1, S2, S3.)
• Outdoor unit’s protection devise connector is open.
• Incorrect wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit (Polarity
is wrong for S1, S2, S3.)
• Remote controller transmission wire short.
• There is no outdoor unit of address 0.
(Address is other than 0.)
• Remote controller transmission wire open.
• After canceling function selection, operation is not possible for
about 30 seconds. (Normal)
w Press the remote controller’s CHECK button twice to perform self-diagnosis. See the table below for the contents of LCD display.
LCD
P1
P2
P4
P5
P6
P8
P9
Fb
Contents of trouble
Abnormality of room temperature thermistor
Abnormality of pipe temperature thermistor/Liquid
Abnormality of drain sensor/ Float switch connector open
Drain overflow protection is working.
Freezing/overheating protection is working.
Abnormality of pipe temperature
Abnormality of pipe temperature thermistor/Cond./Eva
Abnormality of indoor controller board
LCD
U1~UP
F3~F9
E0~E5
E6~EF
---FFFF
PA
Contents of trouble
Malfunction outdoor unit
Malfunction outdoor unit
Remote controller transmitting error
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
No error history
No applied unit
Forced compressor stop(due to water leakage abnormality)
See the table below for details of the LED display (LED 1, 2, 3) on the indoor controller board.
LED1 (microcomputer power supply)
LED2 (remote controller)
Lits when power is supplied.
Lits when power is supplied for wired remote controller.
The indoor unit should be connected to the outdoor unit with address "0" setting.
LED3 (indoor/outdoor communication)
Flash when indoor and outdoor unit are communicating.
35
Test run [for wireless remote controller]
TEST RUN
TEMP
ON/OFF
MODE
,
FAN
AUTO STOP
VANE
AUTO START
CHECK LOUVER
min
TEST RUN
SET
h
RESET
CLOCK
Measure an impedance between the power supply terminal block on
the outdoor unit and ground with a 500V Megger and check that it is
equal to or greater than 1.0M".
1 Turn on the main power to the unit.
2 Press the TEST RUN button twice continuously.
(Start this operation from the status of remote controller display
turned off.)
A TEST RUN and current operation mode are displayed.
MODE
3 Press the
(
) button to activate COOL mode, then
check whether cool air is blown out from the unit.
4 Press the COOL (
) button to activate HEAT mode, then
check whether warm air is blown out from the unit.
FAN
5 Press the
button and check whether strong air is blown out
from the unit.
VANE
6 Press the
button and check whether the auto vane operates
properly.
7 Press the ON/OFF button to stop the test run.
Note:
• Point the remote controller towards the indoor unit receiver
while following steps 2 to 7.
• It is not possible to run in FAN, DRY or AUTO mode.
36
10-3. HOW TO PROCEED "SELF-DIAGNOSIS"
10-3-1. When a Problem Occurs During Operation
If a problem occurs in the air conditioner, the indoor and outdoor units will stop,
and the problem is shown in the remote controller display.
[CHECK] and the refrigerant address are displayed on the temperature
display, and the error code and unit number are displayed alternately as
shown below.
(If the outdoor unit is malfunctioning, the unit number will be "00".)
In the case of group control, for which one remote controller controls
multiple refrigerant systems, the refrigerant address and error code of the unit that first experienced trouble (i.e., the unit that transmitted the error
code) will be displayed.
To clear the error code, press the
ON/OFF button.
(Alternating Display)
Error code (2 or 4 digits)
Address (3 digits) or unit number (2 digits)
When using remote-/local-controller combined operation, cancel the error code after turning off remote operation. During
central control by a MELANS controller, cancel the error code by pressing the
ON/OFF button.
10-3-2. Self-Diagnosis During Maintenance or Service
Since each unit has a function that stores error codes, the latest check code can be recalled even if it is cancelled by the remote
controller or power is turned off.
Check the error code history for each unit using the remote controller.
Switch to self-diagnosis mode.
Set the unit number or refrigerant address you want to diagnose.
Press the [TEMP] buttons (
Press the CHECK
button twice within 3 seconds. The display content
will change as shown below.
and
) to select the desired number
or address. The number (address) changes between [01] and [50] or [00]
and [15].
The refrigerant address will begin to blink
approximately 3 seconds after being
Unit number or refrigerant address
to be diagnosed
selected and the self-diagnosis process will begin.
Display self-diagnosis results.
<When there is error code history>
(For the definition of each error code, refer to the indoor unit's installation manual or service handbook.)
(Alternating Display)
Error code (2 or 4 digits)
Address (3 digits) or unit number (2 digits)
<When there is no error code history>
Reset the error history.
Display the error history in the diagnosis result display screen (see step ).
37
<When there is no corresponding unit>
Press the
ON/OFF button twice within 3 seconds. The self-diagnosis
address or refrigerant address will blink.
When the error history is reset, the display will look like the one shown below.
However, if you fail to reset the error history, the error content will be displayed again.
Cancel self-diagnosis.
Self-diagnosis can be cancelled by the following 2 methods.
Press the
CHECK
Press the
button twice within 3 seconds.
ON/OFF button.
→ Self-diagnosis will be cancelled and the screen will return to the previous state in effect before the start
of self-diagnosis.
→ Self-diagnosis will be cancelled and the indoor unit will stop.
10-3-3. Remote Controller Diagnosis
If the air conditioner cannot be operated from the remote controller, diagnose the remote controller as explained below.
First, check that the power-on indicator is lit.
If the correct voltage (DC12 V) is not supplied to the remote controller, the
indicator will not light.
If this occurs, check the remote controller's wiring and the indoor unit.
Power on indicator
Switch to the remote controller self-diagnosis mode.
Press the CHECK button for 5 seconds or more. The display content will
Press the FILTER button to start self-diagnosis.
change as shown below.
Remote controller self-diagnosis result
[When the remote controller is functioning correctly]
[When the remote controller malfunctions]
(Error display 1) "NG" blinks. → The remote controller's transmitting-receiving circuit is defective.
Check for other possible causes, as there is no problem with the remote
controller.
The remote controller must be replaced with a new one.
[Where the remote controller is not defective, but cannot be operated.]
(Error display 2) [E3], [6833] or [6832] blinks. → Transmission is not possible.
There might be noise or interference on the transmission path, or the indoor unit
or other remote controllers are defective. Check the transmission path and other
controllers.
(Error display 3) "ERC" and the number of data errors are displayed.
→ Data error has occurred.
The number of data errors is the difference between the number of bits sent from
the remote controller and the number actually transmitted through the transmission path. If such a problem is occurring, the transmitted data is affected by noise,
etc. Check the transmission path.
When the number of data errors is "02":
Transmission data from remote controller
Transmission data on transmission path
To cancel remote controller diagnosis
Press the
CHECK button for 5 seconds or more. Remote controller diagnosis will be cancelled, "PLEASE WAIT" and operation lamp will blink. After
approximately 30 seconds, the state in effect before the diagnosis will be restored.
38
10-3-4. Malfunction-diagnosis method by wireless remote controller
<In case of trouble during operation>
When a malfunction occurs to air conditioner, both indoor unit and outdoor unit will stop and operation lamp blinks to inform
unusual stop.
<Malfunction-diagnosis method at maintenance service>
[Procedure]
Refrigerant
address
display
CHECK
CHECK
display
Temperature
button
TEMP
ON/OFF
1. Press the CHECK button twice.
• "CHECK" lights, and refrigerant
address "00" flashes.
• Check that the remote controller's
display has stopped before continuing.
2. Press the temperature
buttons.
• Select the refrigerant address of the
indoor unit for the self-diagnosis.
Note: Set refrigerant address using the
outdoor unit’s DIP switch (SW1).
(For more information, see the
outdoor unit installation manual.)
ON/OFF
button
MODE
FAN
AUTO STOP
VANE
AUTO START
CHECK LOUVER
CHECK
button
min
TEST RUN
SET
h
RESET
CLOCK
HOUR
button
3. Point the remote controller at the • If an air conditioner error occurs, the
sensor on the indoor unit and
indoor unit's sensor emits an intermitpress the HOUR button.
tent buzzer sound, the operation light
flashes, and the error code is
output.
(It takes 3 seconds at most for error
code to appear.)
4. Point the remote controller at the • The check mode is cancelled.
sensor on the indoor unit and
press the ON/OFF button.
39
• Refer to the following tables for details on the check codes.
[Output pattern A]
Beeper sounds
OPERATION
INDICATOR
lamp flash
pattern
Beep
Beep Beep Beep
Off
Beep
1st
2 nd
3 rd
nth
On
On
On
On
Beep Beep
1st
Off
On
2 nd · · · Repeated
On
0.5 sec. Approx. 2.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
Self-check Approx. 2.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
starts
(Start signal
Number of blinks/beeps in pattern indicates the check
Number of blinks/beeps in pattern indicates
received)
code in the following table (i.e., n=5 for “P5”)
the check code in the following table
[Output pattern B]
Beeper sounds
OPERATION
INDICATOR
lamp flash
pattern
Beep
Beep Beep Beep
1st
Off
Self-check Approx. 2.5 sec.
starts
(Start signal
received)
On
Approx. 3 sec.
2nd
Beep
Beep
nth
1st
3 rd
On
On
On
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
On
Off
0.5 sec. Approx. 2.5 sec.
Number of blinks/beeps in pattern indicates the check
code in the following table (i.e., n=5 for “U2”)
On
Approx. 3 sec.
Beep
2 nd · · · Repeated
On
On
0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
Number of blinks/beeps in pattern indicates
the check code in the following table
[Output pattern A] Errors detected by indoor unit
Wireless remote controller Wired remote controller
Beeper sounds/OPERATION
INDICATOR lamp flashes
Check code
(Number of times)
1
P1
P2
2
P9
3
E6,E7
4
P4
P5
5
PA
6
P6
7
EE
8
P8
9
E4, E5
–
10
–
11
12
Fb
E0, E3
–
–
E1, E2
Symptom
Intake sensor error
Pipe (TH2) sensor error
Pipe (TH5) sensor error
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
Drain sensor error/Float switch connector (CN4F) open
Drain pump error
Forced compressor stop (due to water leakage abnormality)
Freezing/Overheating protection operation
Communication error between indoor and outdoor units
Pipe temperature error
Remote controller signal receiving error
Remark
As for indoor
unit, refer to
indoor unit's
service manual.
–
–
Indoor unit control system error (memory error, etc.)
Remote controller transmission error
Remote controller control board error
[Output pattern B] Errors detected by unit other than indoor unit (outdoor unit, etc.)
Wireless remote controller Wired remote controller
Beeper sounds/OPERATION
Symptom
Remark
INDICATOR lamp flashes
Check code
(Number of times)
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
1
E9
(Transmitting error) (Outdoor unit)
Compressor overcurrent interruption
2
UP
Open/short of outdoor unit thermistors
3
U3,U4
Compressor overcurrent interruption (When compressor locked)
4
UF
5
Abnormal high discharging temperature/insufficient refrigerant
U2
For details, check
Abnormal high pressure (63H worked)/Overheating
the LED display
U1,Ud
6
protection operation
of the outdoor
Abnormal temperature of heatsink
controller board.
U5
7
Outdoor unit fan protection stop
8
U8
9
Compressor overcurrent interruption/Abnormal of power module
U6
Abnormality of superheat due to low discharge temperature
10
U7
Abnormality such as overvoltage or voltage shortage and
11
U9,UH
abnormal synchronous signal to main circuit/Current sensor error
–
–
12
–
–
13
Others
Other errors (Refer to the technical manual for the outdoor unit.)
14
*1 If the beeper does not sound again after the initial 2 beeps to confirm the self-check start signal was received and
the OPERATION INDICATOR lamp does not come on, there are no error records.
*2 If the beeper sounds 3 times continuously “beep, beep, beep (0.4 + 0.4 + 0.4 sec.)” after the initial 2 beeps to confirm
the self-check start signal was received, the specified refrigerant address is incorrect.
40
10-4. SELF-DIAGNOSIS ACTION TABLE
<Abnormalities detected when the power is put on>
Error Code
Abnormal points and detection method
(Note 1) Refer to indoor unit section for code P and code E.
Judgment and action
Case
1 No voltage is supplied to termi- 1 Check following items.
nal block (TB1) of outdoor unit.
a) Power supply breaker
a) Power supply breaker is
turned off.
b) Connection of power supply terminal
b) Contact failure or disconnecblock. (TB1)
tion of power supply terminal
c) Open phase (L, L2 or N
c) Connection of power supply terminal
phase)
block. (TB1)
2 Check following items.
2 Electric power is not supplied
to power supply terminal of outdoor power circuit board.
a) Connection of power supply terminal block.
a) Contact failure of power
(TB1)
supply terminal
b) Connection of terminal on outdoor power
b) Open phase on the outdoor
circuit board.
power circuit board
(Disconnection of terminal
on outdoor power circuit
board)
3 Check connection of the connector (CNDC)
3 Electric power is not supplied
on the outdoor controller circuit board.
to outdoor controller circuit
Check connection of the connector, LD1
board.
and LD2 for RP35-71V and CNDC for
a) Disconnection of connector
RP100-250, on the outdoor power circuit
(CNDC)
board (V) / noise filter (Y). Refer to 10-9.
4 Disconnection of reactor (DCL
or ACL)
None
—
4 Check connection of reactor. (DCL or ACL)
RP35-71V: Check connection of “LO” and
“NO” on the outdoor noise filter circuit board.
Check connection of “R” and “S” on the
outdoor power circuit board.
Refer to 10-9.
5 Disconnection of outdoor noise 5 a) Check connection of outdoor noise filter
circuit board.
filter circuit board or parts failb) Replace outdoor noise filter circuit board.
ure in outdoor noise filter circuit
Refer to 10-9.
board (RP200/250)
6 Defective outdoor power circuit 6 Replace outdoor power circuit board.
board
F5
(5201)
7 Open of rush current protect
resistor (RS) (RP100-250Y)
7 Replace rush current protect resistor (RS)
* Power circuit board might be short-circuit.
Check the power circuit board. (Refer to
10-9.)
8 Defective outdoor controller
circuit board
8 Replace controller board (When items
above are checked but the units can not be
repaired.)
63H connector open
1 Disconnection or contact failure
Abnormal if 63H connector circuit is open
of 63H connector on outdoor
for 3 minutes continuously after power supcontroller circuit board
ply.
2 Disconnection or contact failure
63H: High-pressure switch
of 63H
3 63H is working due to defective
parts.
4 Defective outdoor controller
circuit board
41
1 Check connection of 63H connector on
outdoor controller circuit board.
Refer to 10-9.
2 Check the 63H side of connecting wire.
3 Check continuity by tester.
Replace the parts if the parts are defective.
4 Replace outdoor controller circuit board.
Error Code
EA
(6844)
Eb
(6845)
EC
(6846)
Abnormal points and detection method
Case
Miswiring of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire
1. Outdoor controller circuit board can
automatically check the number of
connected indoor units. Abnormal if the
number cannot be checked automatically
due to miswiring of indoor/outdoor unit
connecting wire and etc. after power is
turned on for 4 minutes.
2. Abnormal if outdoor controller circuit
board recognizes excessive number of
indoor units.
1 Contact failure or miswiring of
indoor/outdoor unit connecting
wire
2 Diameter or length of indoor/
outdoor unit connecting wire is
out of specified capacity.
3 Excessive number of indoor
units are connected to 1 outdoor unit.(4 units or more)
4 Defective transmitting receiving
circuit of outdoor controller
circuit board
5 Defective transmitting receiving
circuit of indoor controller board
6 Defective indoor power board
7 2 or more outdoor units have
refrigerant address “0” .
(In case of group control)
8 Noise has entered into power
supply or indoor / outdoor unit
connecting wire.
Judgment and action
1 Check disconnection or looseness or polarity of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire of
indoor and outdoor units.
2 Check diameter and length of indoor/outdoor
unit connecting wire.
Total wiring length: 80m
(including wiring connecting each indoor unit
and between indoor and outdoor unit)
Also check if the connection order of flat
cable is S1, S2, S3.
3 Check the number of indoor units that are
connected to one outdoor unit. (If EA is
detected)
4~6 Turn the power off once, and on again to
check.
Replace outdoor controller circuit board,
indoor controller board or indoor power
board if abnormality occurs again.
7 Check if refrigerant addresses (SW1-3 to
SW1-6 on outdoor controller circuit board)
are overlapping in case of group control
system.
Miswiring of indoor/outdoor unit
connecting wire (converse wiring or disconnection)
Outdoor controller circuit board can
automatically set the unit number of indoor
units.
Abnormal if the indoor unit number can
not be set within 4 minutes after power on
because of Miswiring (converse wiring or
disconnection) of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire.
1 Contact failure or miswiring of
indoor/outdoor unit connecting
wire
8 Check transmission path, and remove the
2 Diameter or length of indoor/
cause.
outdoor unit connecting wire is
out of specified capacity.
w The descriptions above, 1-8, are for EA, Eb
4 Defective transmitting receiving
and EC.
circuit of outdoor controller circuit
board
5 Defective transmitting receiving
circuit of indoor controller board
6 Defective indoor power board
7 2 or more outdoor units have
refrigerant address “0” .
(In case of group control)
8 Noise has entered into power
supply or indoor/outdoor unit
connecting wire.
Start-up time over
The unit cannot finish start-up process
within 4 minutes after power on.
1 Contact failure of indoor/
outdoor unit connecting wire
2 Diameter or length of indoor/
outdoor unit connecting wire is
out of specified capacity.
7 2 or more outdoor units have
refrigerant address “0” .
(In case of group control)
8 Noise has entered into power
supply or indoor/outdoor unit
connecting wire.
42
<Abnormalities detected while unit is operating>
Error Code
Abnormal points and detection method
High pressure (High-pressure switch
63H worked)
Abnormal if high-pressure switch 63H
(RP35-200)/63H1 or 63H2 (RP250) worked
( w ) during compressor operation.
w RP35-140 (63H) : 4.15 MPa
RP200 (63H)
: 3.6 MPa
RP250 (63H1) : 4.15 MPa
(63H2) : 3.6 MPa
63H, 63H1, 63H2: High-pressure switch
U1
(1302)
High discharging temperature
High comp.shell temperature
(1) Abnormal if discharge temperature
thermistor (TH4) exceeds 125: or
110: continuously for 5 minutes.
Abnormal if condenser/evaporator
temperature thermistor (TH5) exceeds
40: during defrosting and discharge
temperature thermistor (TH4) exceeds
110:.
(2) Abnormal if discharge superheat
(Cooling: TH4 – TH5 / Heating: TH4 –
TH6) increases.
All the conditions in A or B are detected
simultaneously for 10 minutes
continuously after 6 minutes past from
compressor start-up (including the
thermostat indication or recovery from
U2
defrosting).
(TH4:1102)
<Condition A>
(TH32:1132)
• Heating mode
• When discharge superheat is less
than 70 deg.
• When the TH6 temp is more than the
value obtained by TH7 – 5 deg.
• When the condensing temp of TH5 is
less than 35:.
<Condition B>
• During comp operation (Cooling and
Heating)
• When discharge superheat is less
than 80 deg in Cooling.
• When discharge superheat is less
than 90 deg in Heating.
• When condensing temp of TH6 is
more than –40:. (In Cooling only.)
(3) Abnormal if comp. shell temperature
thermistor (TH32) exceeds 125°C or
110: continuously for 5 minutes.
Case
1 Short cycle of indoor unit
2 Clogged filter of indoor unit
3 Decreased airflow caused by
dirt of indoor fan
4 Dirt of indoor heat exchanger
5 Locked indoor fan motor
6 Malfunction of indoor fan motor
7 Defective operation of stop
valve (Not full open)
8 Clogged or broken pipe
9 Locked outdoor fan motor
0 Malfunction of outdoor fan
motor
1 Short cycle of outdoor unit
2 Dirt of outdoor heat exchanger
3 Decreased airflow caused by
defective inspection of outside
temperature thermistor
(It detects lower temperature
than actual temperature.)
4 Disconnection or contact failure
of connector (63H) on outdoor
controller board
5 Disconnection or contact failure
of 63H connection
6 Defective outdoor controller
board
7 Defective action of linear
expansion valve
8 Malfunction of fan driving
circuit
Judgment and action
1~6Check indoor unit and repair defect.
1 Overheated compressor operation caused by shortage of
refrigerant
2 Defective operation of stop
valve
3 Defective thermistor
4 Defective outdoor controller
board
5 Defective action of linear
expansion valve
1 Check intake superheat.
Check leakage of refrigerant.
Charge additional refrigerant.
2 Check if stop valve is fully open.
34 Turn the power off and check if U3 is displayed when the power is on again.
When U3 is displayed, refer to “Judgement
and action” for U3.
5 Check linear expansion valve.
Refer to 10-6.
43
7 Check if stop valve is fully open.
8 Check piping and repair defect.
9~2 Check outdoor unit and repair defect.
3 Check the detected temperature of outside
temperature thermistor on LED display.
(SW2 on A-Control Service Tool : Refer to
10-10.)
4~6 Turn the power off and check F5 is
displayed when the power is turned again.
When F5 is displayed, refer to “Judgment
and action” for F5.
7 Check linear expansion valve.
Refer to 10-6.
8 Replace outdoor controller board.
Error Code
Abnormal points and detection method
Judgment and action
Case
Open/short circuit of discharge
temperature thermistor (TH4) / comp.
shell thermistor (TH32)
Abnormal if open (3: or less) or short
U3
(TH4:5104) (217: or more) is detected during
compressor operation.
(TH32:5132)
(Detection is inoperative for 10 minutes
of compressor starting process and for 10
minutes after and during defrosting.)
1 Disconnection or contact
1 Check connection of connector (TH4/TH32)
failure of connector (TH4/TH32)
on the outdoor controller circuit board.
on the outdoor controller circuit
Check breaking of the lead wire for
board
thermistor (TH4/TH32). Refer to 10-9.
2 Defective thermistor
2 Check resistance value of thermistor (TH4/
TH32) or temperature by microcomputer.
3 Defective outdoor controller
circuit board
(Thermistor/TH4/TH32: Refer to 10-6.)
(SW2 on A-Control Service Tool: Refer to 10-10.)
3 Replace outdoor controller board.
Open/short of outdoor unit thermistors
(TH3, TH6, TH7, and TH8)
Abnormal if open or short is detected
during compressor operation.
Open detection of thermistors TH3 and
TH6 is inoperative for 10 seconds to 10
minutes after compressor starting and 10
minutes after and during defrosting.
WCheck which unit has abnormality in its
thermistor by switching the mode of
U4
SW2. (PAC-SK52ST)
(TH3:5105)
(Refer to 10-10.)
(TH6:5107)
(TH7:5106)
(TH8:5110)
1 Disconnection or contact failure 1 Check connection of connector (TH3,TH6/TH7)
of connectors
on the outdoor controller circuit board.
Outdoor controller circuit
Check connection of connector (CN3) on the
board: TH3, TH6/TH7
outdoor power circuit board.
Outdoor power circuit board:
Check breaking of the lead wire for thermistor
CN3
(TH3,TH6,TH7,TH8). Refer to 10-9.
2 Defective thermistor
2 Check resistance value of thermistor
(TH3,TH6,TH7,TH8) or check temperature by
3 Defective outdoor controller
circuit board
microcomputer.
(Thermistor/TH3,TH6,TH7,TH8: Refer to 10-6.)
(SW2 on A-Control Service Tool: Refer to 10-10.)
3 Replace outdoor controller circuit board.
WEmergency operation is available in case of
abnormalities of TH3, TH6 and TH7.
Refer to 10-8.
Symbol
TH3
TH6
TH7
TH8
TH8
Thermistors
Name
Thermistor <Outdoor pipe>
Thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe>
Thermistor <Outdoor>
Thermistor <Heatsink> RP35-140V
Internal thermistor RP100-250Y
Temperature of heatsink
Abnormal if heatsink thermistor (TH8)
detects temperature indicated below.
RP35/ 50 ·········································· 84:
RP60/ 71 ·········································· 77:
RP100-140V ····································· 94:
RP100-250Y ····································· 95:
U5
(4230)
U6
(4250)
U7
(1520)
)
(
1 The outdoor fan motor is
locked.
2 Failure of outdoor fan motor
3 Air flow path is clogged.
4 Rise of ambient temperature
5 Defective thermistor
6 Defective input circuit of
outdoor power circuit board
7 Failure of outdoor fan drive
circuit
Power module
1 Outdoor stop valve is closed.
Check abnormality by driving power module 2 Decrease of power supply voltage
in case overcurrent is detected.
3 Looseness, disconnection or
(UF or UP error condition)
converse of compressor wiring
connection
4 Defective compressor
5 Defective outdoor power circuit
board
Too low superheat due to low discharge
temperature
Abnormal if discharge superheat is
continuously detected less than or equal
to -15: for 3 minutes even though linear
expansion valve has minimum open pulse
after compressor starts operating for 10
minutes.
1 Disconnection or loose
connection of discharge
temperature thermistor (TH4)
2 Defective holder of discharge
temperature thermistor
3 Disconnection or loose connection
of linear expansion valve’s coil
4 Disconnection or loose
connection of linear expansion
valve’s connector
5 Defective linear expansion valve
44
Open detection
Short detection
– 40 or below
– 40 or below
– 40 or below
– 27 or below
– 35 or below
90 or above
90 or above
90 or above
102 or above
170 or above
12 Check outdoor fan.
3 Check air flow path for cooling.
4 Check if there is something which causes
temperature rise around outdoor unit.
(Upper limit of ambient temperature is 46:.)
Turn off power, and on again to check if U5
is displayed within 30 minutes.
If U4 is displayed instead of U5, follow the
action to be taken for U4.
5 Check resistance value of thermistor (TH8)
or temperature by microcomputer.
(Thermistor/TH8: Refer to 10-6.)
(SW2 on A-Control Service Tool: Refer to 10-10.)
6 Replace outdoor power circuit board.
7 Replace outdoor controller circuit board.
1 Open stop valve.
2 Check facility of power supply.
3 Correct the wiring (U•V•W phase) to
compressor. Refer to 10-9 (Outdoor power
circuit board).
4 Check compressor referring to 10-6.
5 Replace outdoor power circuit board.
12 Check the installation conditions of
discharge temperature thermistor (TH4).
3 Check the coil of linear expansion valve.
Refer to 10-7.
4 Check the connection or contact of LEV-A and
LEV-B on outdoor controller circuit board.
5 Check linear expansion valve.
Refer to 10-6.
Error Code
U8
(4400)
Abnormal points and detection method
Overvoltage or voltage shortage and
synchronous signal to main circuit
U9
(4220)
Abnormal if any of followings are detected
during compressor operation;
• Decrease of DC bus voltage to 310V
(RP35-140V only)
• Instantaneous decrease of DC bus voltage
RP35-140V : 200V
RP100-140Y : 350V
RP200/250Y : 400V
• Increase of DC bus voltage to
RP35-71V : 420V
RP100-140V : 400V
RP100-250Y : 760V
• Decrease of input current of outdoor unit
to 0.1A only if operation frequency is
more than or equal to 40Hz or compressor current is more than or equal to 6A.
* Check U9 error detail (SW2 all ON).
Refer to 10-10.
Ud
(1504)
Over heat protection
Abnormal if outdoor pipe thermistor (TH3)
detects 70: or more during compressor
operation.
Compressor overcurrent interruption
(When compressor locked)
Abnormal if overcurrent of DC bus or
compressor is detected within 30 seconds
after compressor starts operating.
UF
(4100)
Case
Outdoor fan motor
1 Failure in the operation of
Abnormal if rotational frequency of the fan
the DC fan motor
motor is not detected during DC fan motor 2 Failure in the outdoor circuit
operation.
controller board
Fan motor rotational frequency is abnormal if;
• 100 rpm or below detected continuously
for 15 seconds at 20: or more outside
air temperature.
• 50 rpm or below or 1500 rpm or more
detected continuously for 1 minute.
Judgment and action
1 Check or replace the DC fan motor.
2 Check the voltage of the outdoor circuit
controller board during operation.
3 Replace the outdoor circuit controller
board. (when the failure is still indicated
even after performing the action 1
above.)
1 Decrease of power supply volt- 1 Check the facility of power supply.
age
2 Correct the wiring (U•V•W phase) to com2 Disconnection of compressor
wiring
pressor. Refer to 10-9 (Outdoor power circuit
board).
3 Defective 52C
3 Replace power circuit board.
(RP100-140V)
4 Defective power circuit board
4 Replace power circuit board.
(RP100-140V)
(RP100-140V)
5 Disconnection or loose con5 Check CN52C wiring.
nection of CN52C (RP35-71V,
RP100-140V)
6 Defective PFC module of out6 Replace outdoor power circuit board.
door power board (RP35-71V)
(RP35-71V)
7 Defective outdoor converter cir- 7 Replace outdoor converter circuit board.
cuit board (RP100-140Y)
(RP100-140Y)
8 Defective 52C drive circuit of
8 Replace outdoor controller circuit board.
outdoor controller circuit board
(RP35-140V)
(RP35-140V)
9 Disconnection or loose
9 Check CN5 wiring on the outdoor power circonnection of CN5 on the
cuit board.
outdoor power circuit board
Refer to 10-9.
0 Defective 52C drive circuit of
0 Replace outdoor power circuit board.
outdoor power circuit board
(RP100-140Y)
(RP100-140Y)
1 Disconnection or loose
1 Check CN2 wiring on the outdoor power circonnection of CN2 on the
cuit board. Refer to 10-9.
outdoor power circuit board
1 Defective outdoor fan (fan
motor) or short cycle of outdoor unit during cooling operation
2 Defective outdoor pipe thermistor (TH3)
3 Defective outdoor controller
board
1 Check outdoor unit air passage.
1 Stop valve is closed.
2 Decrease of power supply
voltage
3 Looseness, disconnection or
converse of compressor wiring
connection
4 Defective compressor
1 Open stop valve.
2 Check facility of power supply.
23 Turn the power off and on again to check
the error code. If U4 is displayed, follow the
U4 processing direction.
3 Correct the wiring (U•V•W phase) to
compressor.
Refer to 10-9 (Outdoor power circuit board).
4 Check compressor.
Refer to 10-6.
5 Defective outdoor power board 5 Replace outdoor power circuit board.
6 Dip switch setting difference of 6 Check the dip switch setting of outdoor controller circuit board.
outdoor controller circuit board.
45
Error Code
UH
(5300)
UL
(1300)
Abnormal points and detection method
Case
Judgment and action
Current sensor error
1 Correct the wiring (U•V•W phase) to compres1 Disconnection of compressor
Abnormal if current sensor detects –1.0A
sor. Refer to 10-9 (Outdoor power circuit
wiring
to 1.0A during compressor operation. (This 2 Defective circuit of current sensor
board).
error is ignored in case of test run mode.)
on outdoor power circuit board
2 Replace outdoor power circuit board.
Low pressure
Abnormal if the following conditions are
detected for continuously 3 minutes after
compressor starts heating operating for 10
minutes.
1. Heating mode
Detection mode 1
TH7-TH3[4: and
TH5-Indoor room temperature[2:
Detection mode 2
TH7-TH3[2:and
TH5-Indoor room temperature[4: and
TH2-Indoor room temperature[4:
Detection mode 3
TH7-TH3[4: and
TH5-Indoor room temperature[2:
and TH4-TH5]20:
2. Cooling mode
TH6-TH7[2: and
TH3-TH7[2: and
Indoor room temperature - Indoor liquid
pipe temperature (TH2)[5:
1 Check stop valve.
1 Stop valve of outdoor unit is
closed during operation.
2 Leakage or shortage of refriger- 2 Check intake superheat.
ant
Check leakage of refrigerant.
Check additional refrigerant.
3 Malfunction of linear expansion 3 Check linear expansion valve.
valve
Refer to 10-6.
4 Clogging with foreign objects in 4 After recovering refrigerant, remove water
refrigerant circuit
from entire refrigerant circuit under vacuum
more than 1 hour.
Clogging occurs in the parts
which become below freezing point when water enters in
refrigerant circuit.
Thermistor TH3: Outdoor liquid pipe temperature
TH4: Discharge temperature
TH5: Indoor cond./eva. temperature
TH6: Outdoor 2-phase pipe temperature
TH7: Outdoor temperature
UP
(4210)
Compressor overcurrent interruption
1 Stop valve of outdoor unit is
Abnormal if overcurrent DC bus or comclosed.
pressor is detected after compressor starts 2 Decrease of power supply voltoperating for 30 seconds.
age
3 Looseness, disconnection or
converse of compressor wiring
connection
4 Defective fan of indoor/outdoor
units
5 Short cycle of indoor/outdoor
units
6 Defective input circuit of outdoor controller board
7 Defective compressor
8 Defective outdoor power circuit
board
9 Dip switch setting difference of
outdoor controller circuit board
Remote controller transmission error
(E0)/signal receiving error (E4)
1 Abnormal if main or sub remote controller cannot receive normally any transmission from indoor unit of refrigerant
address “0” for 3 minutes.
(Error code : E0)
2 Abnormal if sub remote controller could
not receive any signal for 2 minutes.
(Error code: E0)
E0
or
E4
1 Abnormal if indoor controller board can
not receive normally any data from
remote controller board or from other
indoor controller board for 3 minutes.
(Error code: E4)
2 Indoor controller board cannot receive
any signal from remote controller for 2
minutes. (Error code: E4)
1 Contact failure at transmission
wire of remote controller
2 All remote controllers are set
as “sub” remote controller.
In this case, E0 is displayed
on remote controller, and E4
is displayed at LED (LED1,
LED2) on the outdoor controller
circuit board.
3 Miswiring of remote controller
4 Defective transmitting receiving
circuit of remote controller
5 Defective transmitting receiving circuit of indoor controller
board of refrigerant address “0”
6 Noise has entered into the
transmission wire of remote
controller.
1 Open stop valve.
2 Check facility of power supply.
3 Correct the wiring (U•V•W phase) to compressor. Refer to 10-9 (Outdoor power circuit
board).
4 Check indoor/outdoor fan.
5 Solve short cycle.
6 Replace outdoor controller circuit board.
7 Check compressor. Refer to 10-6.
W Before the replacement of the outdoor controller
circuit board, disconnect the wiring to compressor
from the outdoor power circuit board and check the
output voltage among phases, U, V, W, during test
run. No defect on board if voltage among phases
(U-V, V-W and W-U) is same. Make sure to perform
the voltage check with same performing frequency.
8 Replace outdoor power circuit board
9 Check the dip switch setting of outdoor controller circuit board
1 Check disconnection or looseness of indoor
unit or transmission wire of remote controller.
2 Set one of the remote controllers “main” if
there is no problem with the action above.
3 Check wiring of remote controller.
• Total wiring length: max. 500m
(Do not use cable o 3 or more.)
• The number of connecting indoor units:
max. 16 units
• The number of connecting remote controller: max. 2 units
When it is not the above-mentioned problem of
1~3
4 Diagnose remote controllers.
a) When “RC OK” is displayed, remote controllers have no problem. Turn the power
off, and on again to check. If abnormality
generates again, replace indoor controller
board.
b) When “RC NG” is displayed, replace
remote controller.
c) When “RC E3” or “ERC 00-66” is displayed, noise may be causing abnormality.
* If the unit is not normal after replacing indoor controller board in group control, indoor controller
board of address “0” may be abnormal.
46
Error Code
E1
or
E2
E3
or
E5
E6
(6840)
Abnormal points and detection method
Remote controller control board
1 Abnormal if data cannot be normally
read from the nonvolatile memory of the
remote controller control board.
(Error code: E1)
2 Abnormal if the clock function of remote
controller cannot be normally operated.
(Error code: E2)
Case
1 Defective remote controller
Remote controller transmission error
(E3)/signal receiving error (E5)
1 Abnormal if remote controller could not
find blank of transmission path for 6 seconds and could not transmit.
(Error code: E3)
2 Remote controller receives transmitted
data at the same time, compares the
data, and when detecting it, judges
different data to be abnormal 30
continuous times. (Error code: E3)
1 2 remote controller are set as
“main.”
(In case of 2 remote controllers)
2 Remote controller is connected
with 2 indoor units or more.
3 Repetition of refrigerant
address
4 Defective transmitting receiving
circuit of remote controller
1 Abnormal if indoor controller board could 5 Defective transmitting receiving
circuit of indoor controller board
not find blank of transmission path.
(Error code: E5)
6 Noise has entered into trans2 Indoor controller board receives transmission wire of remote controlmitted data at the same time, compares
ler.
the data, and when detecting it, judges
different data to be abnormal 30
continuous times. (Error code: E5)
Indoor/outdoor unit communication
error (Signal receiving error)
1 Abnormal if indoor controller board could
not receive any signal normally for 6
minutes after turning the power on.
2 Abnormal if indoor controller board could
not receive any signal normally for 3
minutes.
3 Consider the unit as abnormal under
the following condition. When 2 or more
indoor units are connected to an outdoor unit, indoor controller board could
not receive a signal for 3 minutes from
outdoor controller circuit board, a signal
which allows outdoor controller circuit
board to transmit signals.
1 Contact failure, short circuit or
miswiring (converse wiring) of
indoor/outdoor unit connecting
wire
2 Defective transmitting receiving circuit of outdoor controller
circuit board.
3 Defective transmitting receiving circuit of indoor controller
board.
4 Noise has entered into indoor/
outdoor unit connecting wire.
5 Defective fan motor
6 Defective rush current resistor
of outdoor power circuit board
Judgment and action
1 Replace remote controller.
1 Set a remote controller to main, and the
other to sub.
2 Remote controller is connected with only one
indoor unit.
3 The address changes to a separate setting.
4~6 Diagnose remote controller.
a) When “RC OK” is displayed, remote controllers have no problem.
Turn the power off, and on again to check.
When becoming abnormal again, replace
indoor controller board.
b) When “RC NG” is displayed, replace
remote controller.
c) When “RC E3” or “ERC 00-66” is displayed, noise may be causing abnormality.
w Check LED display on outdoor controller
circuit board. (Connect A-Control service tool
(PAC-SK52ST))
Refer to EA~EC item if LED displays EA~AC.
1 Check disconnecting or loosenness of indoor
/outdoor unit connecting wire of indoor unit
or outdoor unit.
Check all the units in case of twin/triple/
quadruple indoor unit system.
2~4 Turn the power off, and on again to check.
If abnormality generates again, replace
indoor controller board or outdoor controller
circuit board.
w Other indoor controller board may have
defect in case of twin/triple/quadruple indoor
unit system.
5 Turn the power off, and detach fan motor from connector (CNF1, 2). Then turn the power on again.
If abnormality is not displayed, replace fan motor.
If abnormality is displayed, replace outdoor
controller circuit board.
6 Check the rush current resistor on outdoor
power circuit board with tester. If open is
detected, replace the power circuit board.
E7
Indoor/outdoor unit communication
1 Defective transmitting receiving 1-3 Turn the power off, and on again to check.
error (Transmitting error)
If abnormality generates again, replace
circuit of indoor controller board
Abnormal if “1” receiving is detected 30
indoor controller board.
2 Noise has entered into power
times continuously though indoor controller
supply.
board has transmitted “0”.
3 Noise has entered into outdoor
control wire.
E8
(6840)
Indoor/outdoor unit communication
1 Check disconnection or looseness of indoor/
1 Contact failure of indoor/outerror (Signal receiving error)
outdoor unit connecting wire of indoor or outdoor unit connecting wire
(Outdoor unit)
door units.
2 Defective communication circuit
Abnormal if outdoor controller circuit board
of outdoor controller circuit board 2~4 Turn the power off, and on again to
could not receive anything normally for 3
check. Replace indoor controller board or
3 Defective communication circuit
minutes.
outdoor controller circuit board if abnormalof indoor controller board
ity is displayed again.
4 Noise has entered into indoor/
outdoor unit connecting wire.
E9
(6841)
Indoor/outdoor unit communication
error (Transmitting error) (Outdoor unit)
1 Abnormal if “0” receiving is detected 30
times continuously though outdoor controller circuit board has transmitted “1”.
2 Abnormal if outdoor controller circuit
board could not find blank of transmission
path for 3 minutes.
1 Indoor/ outdoor unit connecting 1 Check disconnection or looseness of indoor/
outdoor unit connecting wire.
wire has contact failure.
2 Defective communication circuit 2~4 Turn the power off, and on again to
check. Replace outdoor controller circuit
of outdoor controller circuit board
board if abnormality is displayed again.
3 Noise has entered power supply.
4 Noise has entered indoor/ outdoor unit connecting wire.
47
Error Code
EF
(6607
or
6608)
Abnormal points and detection method
Non defined error code
This code is displayed when non defined
error code is received.
1 Noise has entered transmission 12 Turn the power off, and on again to check.
Replace indoor controller board or outdoor
wire of remote controller.
controller circuit board if abnormality is
2 Noise has entered indoor/ outdoor unit connecting wire.
displayed again.
3 Outdoor unit is not a series of 3 Replace outdoor unit with power-inverter type
power-inverter.
outdoor unit.
4 Model name of remote control- 4 Replace remote controller with MA remote
ler is PAR-S25A.
controller.
Serial communication error
1Abnormal if serial communication
between outdoor controller circuit
board and outdoor power circuit board
is defective.
12 Check connection of each connector CN2
1 Breaking of wire or contact
and CN4 between the outdoor controller
failure of connector CN2
circuit board and the outdoor power circuit
between the outdoor controller
board.
circuit board and the outdoor
power circuit board
2 Breaking of wire or contact
failure of connector CN4
between the outdoor controller
circuit board and the outdoor
power circuit board
3 Defective communication circuit 3 Replace outdoor power circuit board.
of outdoor power circuit board
4 Defective communication circuit 4 Replace outdoor controller circuit board.
of outdoor controller circuit board
for outdoor power circuit board
2 Abnormal if communication between
outdoor controller circuit board and
M-NET board is not available.
1 Breaking of wire or contact
1 Check disconnection, looseness, or breaking of
failure of connector between
connection wire between outdoor controller ciroutdoor controller circuit board
cuit board (CNMNT) and M-NET board (CN5).
and M-NET board
2 Check disconnection, looseness, or breaking of
connection wire between outdoor controller cir2 Contact failure of M-NET board
power supply line
cuit board (CNMNT) and M-NET board (CND).
3 Noise has entered into M-NET 3 Check M-NET transmission wiring method.
transmission wire.
Ed
(0403)
P8
Judgment and action
Case
Pipe temperature
1 Slight temperature difference
<Cooling mode>
between indoor room
Detected as abnormal when the pipe temtemperature and pipe <liquid
perature is not in the cooling range 3 minor condenser / evaporator>
utes after compressor start and 6 minutes
temperature thermistor
after the liquid or condenser/evaporator pipe
• Shortage of refrigerant
is out of cooling range.
• Disconnected holder of pipe
Note 1) It takes at least 9 minutes to detect.
<liquid or condenser /
Note 2) Abnormality P8 is not detected in
evaporator> thermistor
drying mode.
• Defective refrigerant circuit
Cooling range : Indoor pipe temperature
2 Converse connection of
(TH2 or TH5) – intake temperature
extension pipe (on plural units
(TH1) [ -3 deg
connection)
TH: Lower temperature between liquid pipe 3 Converse wiring of indoor/
temperature and condenser/
outdoor unit connecting wire
evaporator temperature
(on plural units connection)
4 Defective detection of indoor
<Heating mode>
room temperature and pipe
When 10 seconds have passed after the
<condenser / evaporator>
compressor starts operation and the hot
temperature thermistor
adjustment mode has finished, the unit is
5 Stop valve is not opened
detected as abnormal when condenser/
completely.
evaporator pipe temperature is not in heating range within 20 minutes.
Note 3) It takes at least 27 minutes to
detect abnormality.
Note 4) It excludes the period of defrosting
(Detection restarts when defrosting
mode is over)
Heating range : 3 deg [ (Condenser/
Evaporator temperature(TH5) –
intake temperature(TH1))
48
1~4
(
Check pipe <liquid or condenser /
evaporator> temperature with room
temperature display on remote
controller and outdoor controller circuit
board.
Pipe <liquid or condenser / evaporator>
temperature display is indicated by
setting SW2 of outdoor controller circuit
board as follows.
Conduct temperature check with outdoor
controller circuit board after connecting
‘A-Control Service Tool(PAC-SK52ST)’.
)
Temperature display of indoor liquid pipe
Indoor 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
Temperature display of indoor condenser/
evaporator pipe Indoor 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Temperature display of indoor liquid pipe
Indoor 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Temperature display of indoor condenser/
evaporator pipe Indoor 2
1
2
3
5
6
OFF
OFF
A-Control Service Tool
4
ON
ON
SW2 setting
23Check converse connection of extension
pipe or converse wiring of indoor/outdoor
unit connecting wire.
<M-NET communication error>
Error Code
A0
(6600)
A2
(6602)
A3
(6603)
(Note) “Indoor unit” in the text indicates M-NET board in outdoor unit.
Abnormal points and detection method
Case
Address duplicate definition
1 There are 2 or more same
This error is displayed when transmission
address of controller of outfrom the units of same address is detected.
door unit, indoor unit, FRESH
Note) The address and attribute displayed
MASTER, or LOSSNAY.
at remote controller indicate the con- 2 Noise has entered into transtroller that detected abnormality.
mission signal and signal was
transformed.
Hard ware error of transmission
processor
Transmission processor intended to transmit “0”, but “1” appeared on transmission
wire.
Note) The address and attribute display at
remote controller indicate the controller that detected abnormality.
1 Error is detected if waveform is
Judgment and action
Search the unit with same address as abnormality
occurred. If the same address is found, shut the
power supply of outdoor unit and indoor unit and
FRESH MASTER or LOSSNAY at the same time
for 2 minutes or more after the address is corrected, and turn the power on again.
Check transmission waveform or noise on transmission wire.
1 If the works of transmission wire is done
transformed when wiring works of
with the power on, shut off the power supply
transmission wire of outdoor unit,
of outdoor unit and indoor unit and FRESH
indoor unit, FRESH MASTER or
MASTER or LOSSNAY at the same time for
LOSSNAY are done, or polarity is
2 minutes or more, and turn the power on
changed with the power on and
again.
transmission data collide each other. 2 Check transmission waveform or noise on
2 Defective transmitting receiving cirtransmission wire.
cuit of transmission processor
3 Transmission data is changed by the
noise on transmission.
BUS BUSY
1 Transmission processor could
1 Check if transmission wire of indoor unit,
not transmit signal because short
1. Overtime error by collision damage
FRESH MASTER, LOSSNAY, or remote concycle voltage of noise and the
Abnormal if transmitting is not possible
troller is not connected to terminal block for
like have entered into transmisfor 8-10 minutes continuously because
central control (TB7) of outdoor unit.
sion wire continuously.
of collision of transmission.
2 Check if transmission wire of indoor unit,
2. Data could not reach transmission wire 2 Transmission quantity has
FRESH MASTER or LOSSNAY is not conincreased and transmission is
for 8-10 minutes continuously because
nected to terminal block for transmission wire
not possible because there was
of noise or etc.
of outdoor unit.
wiring mistake of terminal block
Note) The address and attribute displayed
3 Check if terminal block for transmission wire
for transmission wire (TB3) and
at remote controller indicate the con(TB3) and terminal block for central control
terminal block for central control
troller that detected abnormality.
(TB7) is not connected.
(TB7) in outdoor unit.
4 Check transmission waveform or noise on
3 Transmission are mixed with
transmission wire.
others and occupation rate on
transmission wire rose because
of defective repeater (a function
to connector or disconnect transmission of control and central
control system) of outdoor unit,
then abnormality is detected.
A6
(6606)
Communication error with communication processor
Defective communication between unit
processor and transmission processor
Note) The address and attribute display at
remote controller indicate the controller that detected abnormality.
1 Data of transmission processor or unit processor is not
transmitted normally because
of accidental trouble such as
noise or thunder surge.
2 Address forwarding from unit
processor is not transmitted
normally because of defective
transmission processor hardware.
49
Turn off the power supply of outdoor unit,
indoor unit and FRESH MASTER or LOSSNAY
at the same time for 2 minutes or more, and
turn the power on again. System returns normally if abnormality was accidental malfunction. If the same abnormality generates again,
abnormality-generated controller may be defective.
Error Code
Abnormal points and detection method
Case
NO ACK signal
1. Transmitting side controller detects
abnormal if a message was transmitted
but there is no reply (ACK) that a message was received. Transmitting side
detects abnormality every 30 seconds, 6
times continuously.
Note) The address and attribute displayed
at remote controller indicate the controller that did not reply (ACK).
Common factor that has no relation with abnormality source
1 The unit of former address
does not exist as address
switch has changed while the
unit was energized.
2 Extinction of transmission wire
voltage and signal is caused
by over-range transmission
wire.
• Maximum distance.......200m
• Remote controller line (12m)
3 Extinction of transmission wire
voltage and signal is caused
by type-unmatched transmission wire.
Type......
With shield wireCVVS, CPEVS
With normal wire (no shield)VCTF, VCTFK, CVV
CVS, VVR, VVF, VCT
Diameter.....1.25mm2 or more
2. If displayed address or attribute is outdoor unit, indoor unit detects abnormality
when indoor unit transmits signal to outdoor unit and there was no reply (ACK).
A7
(6607)
3. If displayed address or attribute is indoor
unit, remote controller detects abnormality when remote controller transmits signal to indoor unit and there was no reply
(ACK).
Judgment and action
Always try the followings when the error
“A7” occurs.
1 Turn off the power supply of outdoor
unit, indoor unit and FRESH MASTER or
LOSSNAY at the same time for 2 minutes or
more, and turn the power on again. If malfunction was accidental, the unit returns to
normal.
2 Check address switch of abnormality-generated address.
3 Check disconnection or looseness of abnormality-generated or abnormality-detected
transmission wire (terminal block and connector)
4 Check if tolerance range of transmission wire
is not exceeded.
5 Check if type of transmission wire is correct
or not.
If there were some trouble of 1-5 above,
repair the defect, then turn off the power supply of outdoor unit, indoor unit and FRESH
4 Extinction of transmission wire
MASTER or LOSSNAY at the same time for 2
voltage and signal is caused
minutes or more, and turn the power on again.
by over-numbered units.
• If there was no trouble with 1-5 above in
5 Accidental malfunction of
single refrigerant system (one outdoor unit),
abnormality-detected controller
controller of displayed address or attribute is
(noise, thunder surge)
defective.
6 Defective of abnormality-gen• If there was no trouble with 1-5 above in diferated controller
ferent refrigerant system (two or more outdoor
1 Contact failure of transmission
units), judge with 6.
wire of outdoor unit or indoor
unit
6 If address of abnormality source is the
2 Disconnection of transmission
address that should not exist, there is the
connector (CN2M) of outdoor
unit that memorizes nonexistent address
unit
information. Delete useless address informa3 Defective transmitting receiving
tion with manual setting function of remote
circuit of outdoor unit or indoor
controller.
unit
Only the system FRESH MASTER or
LOSSNAY are connected to, or the system
1 During group operation with
that is equipped with group setting of differindoor unit of multi- refrigerant
ent refrigerant system.
system, if remote controller
transmits signal to indoor unit
If there was no trouble with 1-6 above, replace
while outdoor unit power supthe controller board of displayed address or
ply of one refrigerant system
attribute.
is turned off or within 2 minIf the unit does not return normally, multi-conutes of restart, abnormality is
troller board of outdoor unit may be defective
detected.
(repeater circuit).
2 Contact failure of transmission Replace multi-controller board one by one to
wire of remote controller or
check if the unit returns normally.
indoor unit
3 Disconnection of transmission
connector (CN2M) of indoor
unit
4 Defective transmitting receiving
circuit of indoor unit or remote
controller
Continued to the next page.
50
From the previous page.
Error Code
Abnormal points and detection method
Case
Judgment and action
4. If displayed address or attribute is
remote controller, indoor unit detects
abnormality when indoor unit transmits
signal to remote controller and there
was no reply (ACK).
Same as mentioned in “A7” of the previous
1 During group operation with
indoor unit of multi- refrigerant page.
system, if indoor unit transmit
signal to remote controller
while outdoor unit power supply of one refrigerant system
is turned off or within 2 minutes of restart, abnormality is
detected.
2 Contact failure of transmission
wire of remote controller or
indoor unit
3 Disconnection of transmission
connector (CN2M) of indoor
unit
4 Defective transmitting receiving
circuit of indoor unit or remote
controller
5. If displayed address or attribute is
FRESH MASTER, indoor unit detects
abnormality when indoor unit transmits
signal to FRESH MASTER and there
was no reply (ACK).
1 During sequential operation
of indoor unit and FRESH
MASTER of other refrigerant
system, if indoor unit transmits
signal to FRESH MASTER
while outdoor unit power supply of same refrigerant system with FRESH MASTER is
turned off or within 2 minutes
of restart, abnormality is
detected.
2 Contact failure of transmission
wire of indoor unit or FRESH
MASTER
3 Disconnection of transmission
connector (CN2M) of indoor
unit or FRESH MASTER
4 Defective transmitting receiving
circuit of indoor unit or FRESH
MASTER
A7
(6607)
6. If displayed address or attribute is
1 If the power supply of
LOSSNAY is off, indoor unit
LOSSNAY, indoor unit detects abnormaldetects abnormality when it
ity when indoor unit transmits signal to
transmits signal to LOSSNAY.
LOSSNAY and there was no reply (ACK).
2 During sequential operation
of indoor unit and LOSSNAY
of other refrigerant system, if
indoor unit transmits signal to
LOSSNAY while outdoor unit
power supply of same refrigerant system with LOSSNAY
is turned off or within 2 minutes of restart, abnormality is
detected.
3 Contact failure of transmission wire of indoor unit of
LOSSNAY
4 Disconnection of transmission
connector (CN2M) of indoor
unit
5 Defective transmitting receiving circuit of indoor unit or
LOSSNAY
7. If displayed address or attribute is nonexistent.
1 The unit of former address
does not exist as address
switch has changed while the
unit was energized.
2 Abnormality is detected
when indoor unit transmits
signal because the address
of FRESH MASTER and
LOSSNAY are changed after
sequential operation of FRESH
MASTER and LOSSNAY by
remote controller.
51
Error Code
A8
(6608)
Abnormal points and detection method
Case
Judgment and action
M-NET NO RESPONSE
1 Transmitting condition is
1 Check transmission waveform or noise on
Abnormal if a message was transmitted
repeated fault because of
transmission wire.
and there were reply (ACK) that message
noise and the like.
2 Turn off the power supply of outdoor unit
was received, but response command
and indoor unit and FRESH MASTER or
2 Extension of transmission wire
does not return. Transmitting side detects
voltage and signal is caused
LOSSNAY at the same time for 2 minutes or
abnormality every 30 seconds, 6 times
by over-range transmission
more, and turn the power on again. If malcontinuously.
wire.
function was accidental, the unit returns to
Note) The address and attribute displayed
• Maximum distance ...... 200m
normal. If the same abnormality generates
at remote controller indicate the con• Remote controller line (12m)
again, controller of displayed address and
troller that did not reply (ACK).
attribute may be defective.
3 Extension of transmission wire
voltage and signal is caused
by type-unmatched transmission wire.
Type.........
With shield wireCVVS, CPEVS
With normal wire (no shield)VCTF, VCTFK, CVV
CVS, VVR, VVF, VCT
Diameter ..... 1.25mm2 or more
4 Accidental malfunction of
abnormality-generated
controller
10-5. TROUBLESHOOTING BY INFERIOR PHENOMENA
Phenomena
1. Remote controller display does not
work.
Factor
1DC12V is not supplied to remote controller.
(Power supply display
is not indicated on LCD.)
2DC12~15V is supplied to remote controller, however,
no display is indicated.
• “PLEASE WAIT” is not displayed.
• “PLEASE WAIT” is displayed.
Countermeasure
1 Check LED2 on indoor controller board.
(1) When LED2 is lit.
Check the remote controller wiring for
breaking or contact failure.
(2) When LED2 is blinking.
Check short circuit of remote controller
wiring.
(3) When LED2 is not lit.
Refer to phenomena No.3 below.
2 Check the following.
• Failure of remote controller if “PLEASE
WAIT” is not displayed
• Refer to phenomena No.2 below if
“PLEASE WAIT” is displayed.
2. “PLEASE WAIT” display is remained 1At longest 2 minutes after the power supply “PLEASE 1 Normal operation
on the remote controller.
WAIT” is displayed to start up.
2 Self-diagnosis of remote controller
3 ”PLEASE WAIT” is displayed for 6 min2Communication error between the remote controller
utes at most in case of indoor/outdoor
and indoor unit
unit communication error. Check LED3 on
3Communication error between the indoor and outdoor
indoor controller board.
unit
(1) When LED3 is not blinking.
4Outdoor unit protection device connector is open.
Check indoor/outdoor connecting wire
for Miswiring.
(Converse wiring of S1 and S2, or
break of S3 wiring.)
(2) When LED3 is blinking.
Indoor/outdoor connecting wire is normal.
4 Check LED display on outdoor controller
circuit board. Refer to 10-10.
Check protection device connector (63H)
for contact failure.
Refer to 10-9.
3. When pressing the remote controller 1After cancelling to select function from the remote
operation switch, the OPERATION
controller, the remote controller operation switch will
display is appeared but it will be
be not accepted for approx. 30 seconds.
turned off soon.
52
1 Normal operation
Factor
Phenomena
Countermeasure
4. Even controlling by the wireless
1The pair number settings of the wireless remote
1Check the pair number settings.
remote controller, no beep is heard
controller and indoor controller board are mismatched.
and the unit does not start operating. Operation display is indicated
on wireless remote controller.
5. When operating by the wireless
remote controller, beep sound is
heard, however, unit does not start
operating.
1No operation for 2 minutes at most after the power
1Normal operation
supply ON.
2Local remote controller operation is prohibited.
2Normal operation
• Remote controlling adaptor is connected to CN32
on the indoor controller board.
• Local remote controller operation is prohibited
by centralised controller etc. since it is connected to
MELANS.
3Phenomena of No.2.
3Check the phenomena No.2.
6. Remote controller display works
normally and the unit performs cooling operation, however, the capacity
cannot be fully obtained. (The air
does not cool well.)
1Refrigerant shortage
2Filter clogging
3Heat exchanger clogging
4Air duct short cycle
1• If refrigerant leaks, discharging temperature rises and LEV opening increases.
Inspect leakage by checking the temperature and opening.
• Check pipe connections for gas leakage.
2Open suction grille and check the filter.
Clean the filter by removing dirt or dust on
it.
3• If the filter is clogged, indoor pipe temperature rises and discharging pressure
increases. Check if heat exchanger is
clogged by inspecting discharging pressure.
• Clean the heat exchanger.
4Remove the blockage.
7. Remote controller display works
1• Discharging temperature and indoor heat
1Linear expansion valve fault
normally and the unit performs heatexchanger temperature does not rise.
Opening cannot be adjusted well due to linear expaning operation, however, the capacity
Inspect the failure by checking dischargsion valve fault.
cannot be fully obtained.
ing pressure.
2Refrigerant shortage
• Replace linear expansion valve.
3Lack of insulation for refrigerant piping
2• If refrigerant leaks, discharging tempera
4Filter clogging
ture rises and LEV opening increases.
5Heat exchanger clogging
Inspect leakage by checking the tem6Air duct short cycle
perature and opening.
7Bypass circuit of outdoor unit fault
• Check pipe connections for gas leakage.
3Check the insulation.
4Open suction grille and check the filter.
Clean the filter by removing dirt or dust on
it.
5• If the filter is clogged, indoor pipe temperature rises and discharging pressure
increases. Check if heat exchanger is
clogged by inspecting discharging pressure.
• Clean the heat exchanger.
6Remove the blockage.
7Check refrigerant system during operation.
12Normal operation
8. 1For 3 minutes after temperature
(For protection of compressor)
adjuster turns off, the compressor
will not start operating even if temperature adjuster is turned on.
2For 3 minutes after temperature
adjuster turns on, the compressor
will not stop operating even if temperature adjuster is turned off.
(Compressor stops operating
immediately when turning off by
the remote controller.)
53
12Normal operation
Symptoms: “PLEASE WAIT” is kept being displayed on the remote controller.
Diagnosis flow
Cause
Inspection method and
troubleshooting
Check the display time of “PLEASE WAIT”
after turning on the main power.
6 minutes
or more
How long is “PLEASE WAIT”
kept being displayed on the
remote controller?
2 minutes
or less
2 to 6
minutes
Are any error codes
displayed on the
remote controller?
Check the LED display of the
outdoor controller circuit board.
Are any error codes
displayed on the LED?
• “PLEASE WAIT”
• Normal.
will be displayed
The start-up diagnosis will
during the start-up
be over in around 2 minutes.
diagnosis after turning
on the main power.
NO
YES
YES
• Miswiring of indoor/
outdoor connecting
wire
• Breaking of indoor/
outdoor connecting
wire (S3)
• Defective indoor
controller board
• Defective outdoor
controller circuit
board
NO
• Defective indoor
controller board
• Defective remote
controller
54
• Refer to “Self-diagnosis
action table” in order to
solve the trouble.
• In case of communication
errors, the display of
remote controller may not
match the LED display of
the outdoor unit.
Symptoms: Nothing is displayed on the remote controller Diagnosis flow
Cause
LED display of the indoor
controller board
LED1 :
LED2 :
LED3 :
Inspection method and
troubleshooting
Check the voltage between S1
and S2 on the terminal block
(TB4) of the indoor unit which
is used to connect the indoor
unit and the outdoor unit.
AC 198V to AC 264V?
YES
NO
Check the voltage among L(L3) and
N on the terminal block (TB1) of the
outdoor power circuit board.
AC 198V to AC 264V?
NO
• Troubles concerning
power supply.
• Check the power wiring
to the outdoor unit.
• Check the breaker.
• Bad wiring of the
outdoor controller
board.
• The fuses on the
outdoor controller
circuit board are
blown.
• Check the wiring of the
outdoor unit.
• Check if the wiring is bad.
Check if the fuses are blown.
The fuses on the outdoor
controller circuit board will
be blown when the indoor
/outdoor connecting wire
short-circuits.
• Bad wiring of the
outdoor controller
board.
• The fuses on the
outdoor controller
circuit board are
blown.
• Check if miswiring, breaking
or poor contact is causing this
problem. Indoor/outdoor
connecting wire is polarized
3-core type. Connect the
indoor unit and the outdoor
unit by wiring each pair of
S1, S2 and S3 on the both
side of indoor/outdoor
terminal blocks.
• Defective indoor
controller board
• Replace the indoor
controller board.
YES
Check the voltage between S1
and S2 on the terminal block
(TB1) of the outdoor unit which
is used to connect the indoor
unit and the outdoor unit.
AC 198V to AC 264V?
YES
Check the voltage of indoor
controller board (CN2D).
DC 12V to DC 16V?
YES
NO
Check the voltage of the unit after
removing the indoor power board
(CN2S).
DC 12V to DC 16V?
YES
NO
• Miswiring, breaking
• Check if there is miswiring
or poor connection of or breaking of wire.
in door/outdoor
connecting wire
NO
• Defective indoor
power board
55
• Replace the indoor
power board.
Symptoms: Nothing is displayed on the remote controller Diagnosis flow
Cause
LED display of the indoor
controller board
LED1 :
LED2 :
LED3 :
or
Inspection method and
troubleshooting
Check the voltage between S1 and S2 on the terminal block (TB4)
of the indoor unit which is used to connect the indoor unit and the
outdoor unit.
NO
AC 198V to AC 264V?
YES
Not lighting.
Check the status
of the indoor controller
board LED3 display.
Check the looseness or disconnection
of the indoor/outdoor connecting wire.
Blinking.
Are there looseness or
disconnection of the indoor/
outdoor connecting wire?
YES
NO
• Breaking or poor contact • Fix the breaking or poor
of the indoor/outdoor contact of the indoor/outdoor
connecting wire
connecting wire.
Check the refrigerant address of
the outdoor unit. (SW1-3 to 1-6)
NO
Is the refrigerant
address “0”?
YES
Check the LED display of the
outdoor unit after turning on the
main power again.
Not displayed.
Is anything displayed?
Displayed.
Is “EA” or “Eb”
displayed?
• Normal.
Only the unit which
has the refrigerant
address “0” supplies
power to the remote
controller.
• Set the refrigerant
address to “0”. In case of
the multiple grouping
system, recheck the
refrigerant address again.
• Defective outdoor
controller circuit
board
• Replace the outdoor
controller circuit board.
• Defective outdoor
controller circuit
board
• Replace the outdoor
controller circuit board.
• Defective indoor
controller board
• Replace the indoor controller
board of the indoor unit which
doesn’t operate.
NO
YES
Is “E8” displayed?
YES
NO
Can the unit be restarted?
NO
Can all the indoor
unit be operated?
Check the voltage between S2
and S3 on the terminal block of
the outdoor unit.
DC 17V to DC 28V?
YES
• Influence of
• Not abnormal.
electromagnetic noise There may be the influence
of electromagnetic noise.
Check the transmission wire
and get rid of the causes.
NO
YES
56
• Defective outdoor
power circuit board
• Replace the outdoor
power circuit board.
• Defective indoor
power board
• Replace the indoor
power board.
Symptoms: Nothing is displayed on the remote controller Diagnosis flow
Cause
LED display of the indoor
controller board
LED1 :
LED2 :
or
LED3 : —
Inspection method and
troubleshooting
Check the voltage of the
terminal block (TB6) of
the remote controller.
DC 10V to DC 16V?
YES
• Defective
remote controller
• Replace the
remote controller.
NO
Check the status
of the LED2.
Lighting
• Breaking or poor
• Check if there is breaking
contact of the remote or poor contact of the
controller wire
remote controller wire.
Check the voltage of the
terminal block (TB5)
connecting the remote
controller wire.
If it is not between DC 10V
and DC16V, the indoor
controller board must be
defective.
Blinking
Check the status of the LED2
after disconnecting the remote
controller wire from the terminal
block (TB5) of the indoor unit.
Check the status
of the LED2.
Lighting
• The remote controller • Check if the remote
wire short-circuits
controller wire is
short-circuited.
Blinking
• Defective indoor
controller board
57
• Replace the indoor
controller board.
• Before repair
Frequent calling from customers
Phone Calls From Customers
How to Respond
Note
Unit does The operating display of remote Check if power is supplied to air conditioner.
not operate
controller does not come on.
Nothing appears on the display unless power is
at all.
supplied.
Unit cannot be restarted for a Wait around 3 minutes to restart unit.
while after it’s stopped.
The air conditioner is in a state of being protected
by the microcomputer’s directive. Once the
compressor is stopped, the unit cannot be
restarted for 3 minutes. This control is also applied
when the unit is turned on and off by remote
controller.
Error code appears and blinks Error code will be displayed if any protection
on the display of remote
devices of the air conditioner are actuated.
controller.
What is error code?
Remote
controller
“PLEASE WAIT” is displayed
on the screen.
Wait around 2 minutes.
An automatic startup test will be conducted for
2 minutes when power is supplied to the air
conditioner. “PLEASE WAIT” will be kept being
displayed while that time.
“FILTER” is displayed on the
screen.
This indicates that it is time to clean the air filters.
Clean the air filters. Press the FILTER button on
the remote controller twice to clear “FILTER” from
the display.
See the operation manual that came with the
product for how to clean the filters.
“STANDBY” is displayed on the This is displayed when the unit starts HEAT
screen.
operation, when the thermostat puts the
compressor in operation mode, or when the
outdoor unit ends DEFROST operation and
returns to HEAT operation.
The display will automatically disappear around
10 minutes later.
While “STANDBY” is displayed on the remote
controller, the airflow amount will be restricted
because the indoor unit’s heat exchanger is not
fully heated up. In addition to that, the up/down
vane will be automatically set to horizontal blow
in order to prevent cold air from directly blowing
out to human body. The up/down vane will return
to the setting specified by the remote controller
when “STANDBY” is released.
“DEFROST” is displayed on
The outdoor unit gets frosted when the outside
the screen. (No air comes out of
temperature is low and the humidity is high.
the unit.)
“DEFROST” indicates the DEFROST
operation is being performed to melt this frost. The
DEFROST operation ends in around 10 minutes
(at most 15 minutes).
During the DEFROST operation, the indoor unit’s
heat exchanger becomes cold, so the fan is
stopped. The up/down vane will be automatically
set to horizontal blow in order to prevent cold air
from directly blowing out to human body. The
display will turn into “STANDBY” when DEFROST
operation ends.
58
Refer to “SELF-DIAGNOSIS
ACTION TABLE”.
Check if servicing is
required for the error.
Display time of “FILTER”
depends on the model.
Long life filter: 2500 hrs.
Standard filter: 100 hrs.
Phone Calls From Customers
How to Respond
Note
The room cannot be cooled or heated sufficiently. Check the set temperature of remote controller.
The outdoor unit cannot be operated if the set
temperature is not appropriate.
The outdoor unit operates in the following modes.
COOL: When the set temperature is lower
than the room temperature.
HEAT: When the set temperature is higher
than the room temperature.
Check if filters are not dirty and clogged. If filters
are clogged, the airflow amount will be reduced
and the unit capacity will be lowered. See the
instruction manual that came with the product for
how to clean the filters.
Check there is enough space around the air
conditioner.
If there are any obstacles in the air intake or air
outlet of indoor/outdoor units, they block the
airflow direction so that the unit capacity will be
lowered.
An gas escaping sound is heard This is not a malfunction.
Sound
comes out
sometimes.
This is the sound which is heard when the flow of
from the air
refrigerant in the air conditioner is switched.
conditioner.
A cracking sound is heard
This is not a malfunction.
sometimes.
This is the sound which is heard when internal
parts of units expand or contract when the
temperature changes.
A buzzing sound is heard
sometimes.
This is not a malfunction.
This is the sound which is heard when the outdoor
unit starts operating.
A ticking sound is heard from
the outdoor unit sometimes.
This is not a malfunction.
This is the sound which is heard when the fan of
the outdoor unit is controlling the airflow amount
in order to keep the optimum operating condition.
A sound, similar to water
flowing, is heard from the unit.
This is not a malfunction.
This is the sound which is heard when the
refrigerant is flowing inside the indoor unit.
Something The fan speed does not match
is wrong
the setting of the remote
with the
controller during DRY
blower…..
operation.(No air comes out
sometimes during DRY
operation.)
This is not a malfunction.
During the DRY operation, the blower’s ON/OFF is
controlled by the microcomputer to prevent
overcooling and to ensure efficient dehumidification.
The fan speed cannot be set by the remote
controller during DRY operation.
The fan speed does not match
the setting of the remote
controller in HEAT operation.
This is not a malfunction.
1) When the HEAT operation starts, to prevent the
unit from blowing cold air, the fan speed is
gradually increased from zero to the set speed,
in proportion to the temperature rise of the
discharged air.
2) When the room temperature reaches the set
temperature and the outdoor unit stops,
the unit starts the LOW AIR operation.
3) During the HEAT operation, the DEFROST
operation is performed to defrost the outdoor
unit. During the DEFROST operation, the
blower is stopped to prevent cold air coming
out of the indoor unit.
59
The up/down vane will be
automatically set to
horizontal blow in these
cases listed up on the left
(
~). After a while, the
up/down vane will be
automatically moved
according to the setting of
the remote controller.
Phone Calls From Customers
Something Air blows out for a while after
is wrong
HEAT operation is stopped.
with the
blower…..
How to Respond
Note
This is not a malfunction.
The blower is operating just for cooling down the
heated-up air conditioner. This will be done within
1 minute.
This control is conducted only when the HEAT
operation is stopped with the electric heater ON.
However, this control is also
applied to the models which
has no electric heater.
Something The airflow direction is changed If the up/down vane is set to downward in COOL
is wrong
during COOL operation.
operation, it will be automatically set to horizontal
with the
blow by the microcomputer in order to prevent
airflow
water from dropping down.
direction….
“1 Hr.” will be displayed on the remote controller if
the up/down vane is set to downward with the fan
speed set to be less than “LOW”.
The airflow direction is changed In HEAT operation, the up/down vane is
during HEAT operation.
automatically controlled according to the
temperature of the indoor unit’s heat exchanger.
(The airflow direction cannot be
In the following cases written below, the up/down
set by remote controller.)
vane will be set to horizontal blow, and the setting
cannot be changed by remote controller.
1) At the beginning of the HEAT operation
2) While the outdoor unit is being stopped by
thermostat or when the outdoor unit gets started
to operate.
3) During DEFROST operation
The airflow direction will be back to the setting of
remote controller when the above situations are
released.
“STANDBY” will be displayed
on the remote controller in
case of and .
“DEFROSTING” will be
displayed on the screen in
case of .
The airflow direction does not
1) Check if the vane is set to a fixed position.
(Check if the vane motor connector is
change.
removed.)
(Up/down vane, left/right louver)
2) Check if the air conditioner has a function for
switching the air direction.
3) If the air conditioner doesn’t have that
function, “NOT AVAILABLE” will be displayed
on the remote controller when “AIR
DIRECTION” or “LOUVER” button is pressed.
The air conditioner starts operating even though
any buttons on the remote controller are not
pressed.
Check if you set ON/OFF timer.
The air conditioner starts operating at the time
designated if ON timer has been set before.
Check if any operations are ordered by distant
control system or the central remote controller.
While “CENTRALLY CONTROLLED INDICATOR”
is displayed on the remote controller, the air
conditioner is under the control of external
directive.
There might be a case that
“CENTRALLY CONTROLLED
INDICATOR” will not be
displayed.
Check if power is recovered from power failure
(black out).
The units will automatically start operating when
power is recovered after power failure (black out)
occurs. This function is called “auto recovery
feature from power ”.
The air conditioner stops even though any
Check if you set ON/OFF timer.
buttons on the remote controller are not pressed.
The air conditioner stops operating at the time
designated if OFF timer has been set before.
Check if any operations are ordered by distant
control system or the central remote controller.
While “CENTRALLY CONTROLLED INDICATOR” is
displayed on the remote controller, the air conditioner is
under the control of external directive.
60
There might be a case that
“CENTRALLY
CONTROLLED INDICATOR”
will not be displayed.
Phone Calls From Customers
How to Respond
A white mist is expelled from the indoor unit.
This is not a malfunction.
This may occur when the operation gets started in
the room of high humidity.
Water or moisture is expelled from the outdoor
unit.
Cooling; when pipes or piping joints are cooled, they
get sweated and water drips down.
Heating; water drips down from the heat exchanger.
* Make use of optional parts “Drain Socket” and
“Drain pan” if these water needs to be collected and
drained out for once.
The display of wireless remote controller gets dim Batteries are being exhausted. Replace them and
or does not come on.
press the reset button of remote controller.
The indoor unit does not receive a signal from
remote controller at a long distance.
61
Note
10-6. HOW TO CHECK THE PARTS
PUHZ-RP35/50/60/71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100/125/140VKA
PUHZ-RP100/125/140/200/250YKA
Check points
Parts name
Thermistor (TH3)
<Outdoor pipe>
Disconnect the connector then measure the resistance with a tester.
Thermistor (TH4)
(At the ambient temperature 10~30)
<Discharge>
Thermistor (TH6)
Normal
Abnormal
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>
TH4, TH32
160k~410k
Thermistor (TH7)
TH3
<Outdoor>
Thermistor (TH8)
TH6
Open or short
4.3k~9.6k
<Heatsink>
TH7
Thermistor (TH32)
<Shell>
TH33
Thermistor (TH33)
TH8
39k~105k
<Outdoor pipe>
Fan motor(MF1,MF2) Refer to next page.
Solenoid valve coil
<Four-way valve>
(21S4)
Measure the resistance between the terminals with a tester.
(At the ambient temperature 20)
Normal
Abnormal
RP35-71
RP100-250
2350±170
1435±150
Open or short
Motor for compressor Measure the resistance between the terminals with a tester.
(Winding temperature 20)
U
(MC)
V
Normal
Abnormal
Refer to 5-2.
Open or short
W
Linear expansion valve Disconnect the connector then measure the resistance with a tester.
(Winding temperature 20)
(LEV-A/ LEV-B)
For RP35-RP71
M
Red
1
2
Blue
3
Orange
4
Yellow 5
White
6
Normal
Brown
Red - White
Red - Orange
Brown - Yellow
Abnormal
Brown - Blue
46±4
Open or short
Linear expansion valve Disconnect the connector then measure the resistance with a tester.
(LEV-A/LEV-B/LEV-C) (Winding temperature 20)
For RP100-RP250
M
Gray
Orange
Red
Yellow
Black
1
2
3
4
5
6
Abnormal
Normal
Gray - Black
Gray - Red
Gray - Yellow
46±3
62
Gray - Orange
Open or short
Check method of DC fan motor (fan motor / outdoor controller circuit board)
Notes
· High voltage is applied to the connecter (CNF1, 2) for the fan motor. Pay attention to the service.
· Do not pull out the connector (CNF1, 2) for the motor with the power supply on.
(It causes trouble of the outdoor controller circuit board and fan motor.)
Self check
Symptom : The outdoor fan cannot turn around.
Fuse check
Check the fuse (F5) on outdoor
controller board.
Did the fuse blow?
Yes
Replace outdoor controller board (C.B)
and fan motor (MF1, 2).
No
Wiring contact check
Contact of fan motor connector (CNF1, 2)
Is there contact failure?
Yes
Recover wiring.
No
Power supply check (Remove the connector (CNF1, 2))
Measure the voltage in the outdoor controller circuit board.
TEST POINT : VDC (between 1 (+) and 4 (-) of the fan connector): VDC DC250~330V
TEST POINT : VCC (between 5 (+) and 4 (-) of the fan connector): VCC DC15V
Is the voltage normal?
Yes
Yes
No
Check the operation of fan.
Replace outdoor
controller board.
NG
Replace outdoor controller board.
OK
Check the operation.
Replace the fan motor.
END
NG
Replace the fan motor.
63
OK
END
10-7. HOW TO CHECK THE COMPONENTS
<Thermistor feature chart>
50
Low temperature thermistors
<Outdoor pipe> (TH3)
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
<Outdoor> (TH7)
<Outdoor pipe> (TH33)
40
Resistance (k)
• Thermistor
• Thermistor
• Thermistor
• Thermistor
Thermistor R0 = 15k' ± 3%
B constant = 3480 ± 2%
Rt =15exp{3480(
0:
10:
20:
25:
15k'
9.6k'
6.3k'
5.2k'
1
1
)}
–
273+t 273
30:
4.3k'
40:
3.0k'
30
20
10
0
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature ()
200
Medium temperature thermistor
• Thermistor <Heatsink> (TH8)
WRP35-RP71V only
150
Resistance (k)
Thermistor R50 = 17k' ± 2%
B constant = 4150 ± 3%
1
1
Rt =17exp{4150( 273+t – 323)}
0:
25:
50:
70:
90:
180k'
50k'
17k'
8k'
4k'
100
50
0
50
75
100
Temperature ()
125
500
High temperature thermistor
• Thermistor <Discharge> (TH4)
• Thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
400
Resistance (k)
Thermistor R120 = 7.465k' ± 2%
B constant = 4057 ± 2%
1
1
Rt =7.465exp{4057( 273+t – 393)}
20: 250k'
30: 160k'
40: 104k'
50: 70k'
60: 48k'
25
70:
34k'
80:
24k'
90: 17.5k'
100: 13.0k'
110: 9.8k'
300
200
100
0
64
25
50
75
Temperature ()
100
120
Linear expansion valve
(RP35-RP71)
(1) Operation summary of the linear expansion valve
• Linear expansion valve opens/closes through stepping motor after receiving the pulse signal from the outdoor controller board.
• Valve position can be changed in proportion to the number of pulse signal.
<Connection between the outdoor controller board and the linear expansion valve>
Outdoor controller board
RP35-RP71
DC12V
Red
1
Brown
2
Blue
3
:4
:3
Orange 4
:3
:2
Yellow
5
:2
:1
White
6
:1
LEV
Drive circuit
3
:4
M
2
1
5
4
6
Connector LEV-A
LEV-B
<Output pulse signal and the valve operation>
Output
(Phase)
Output
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
:1
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
:2
OFF ON
:3
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
:4
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
(2) Linear expansion valve operation
Valve position (capacity)
Opening a valve : 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 8
Closing a valve : 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 1
The output pulse shifts in above order.
· When linear expansion valve operation stops, all output phase
become OFF.
· When the switch is turned on, 700 pulse closing valve signal will
be sent till it goes to A point in order to define the valve position.
(The pulse signal is being sent for about 20 seconds.)
When the valve moves smoothly, there is no sound or vibration
occurring from the linear expansion valve : however, when the
pulse number moves from B to A or when the valve is locked,
more sound can be heard.
No sound is heard when the pulse number moves from B to A in
case coil is burnt out or motor is locked by open-phase.
Close
Open
· Sound can be detected by placing the ear against the screw driver handle while putting the screw driver to the linear expansion
valve.
500 pulse
Opening a valve
all the way
Pulse number
Extra tightning (about 32 pulse)
65
(RP100-RP250)
Linear expansion valve
(1) Operation summary of the linear expansion valve
• Linear expansion valve opens/closes through stepping motor after receiving the pulse signal from the outdoor controller board.
• Valve position can be changed in proportion to the number of pulse signal.
<Connection between the outdoor controller board and the linear expansion valve>
Outdoor controller board
DC12V
Gray
LEV
1
Drive circuit
3
Orange 3
:4
4
:3
:2
Yellow 5
:2
:1
Black
6
:1
:4
M
2
1
5
4
:3
6
Red
Connector LEV-A
LEV-B
LEV-C
<Output pulse signal and the valve operation>
Output
(Phase)
Output
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
:1
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
:2
OFF ON
:3
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
:4
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Opening a valve : 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 8
Closing a valve : 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 1
The output pulse shifts in above order.
· When linear expansion valve operation stops, all output phase
become OFF.
(2) Linear expansion valve operation
Valve position (capacity)
· When the switch is turned on, 700 pulse closing valve signal will
be sent till it goes to A point in order to define the valve position.
(The pulse signal is being sent for about 20 seconds.)
When the valve moves smoothly, there is no sound or vibration
occurring from the linear expansion valve : however, when the
pulse number moves from B to A or when the valve is locked,
more sound can be heard.
No sound is heard when the pulse number moves from B to A in
case coil is burnt out or motor is locked by open-phase.
Close
Open
· Sound can be detected by placing the ear against the screw driver handle while putting the screw driver to the linear expansion
valve.
500 pulse
Opening a valve
all the way
Pulse number
Extra tightning (about 32 pulse)
66
(3) How to attach and detach the coil of linear expansion valve (RP35-RP71)
<Composition>
Linear expansion valve is separable into the main body and the coil as shown in the diagram below.
Main body
Coil
Lead wire
Stopper
<How to detach the coil>
Hold the lower part of the main body (shown as A) firmly so that
the main body does not move and detach the coil by pulling it
upward.
Be sure to detach the coil holding main body firmly. Otherwise
pipes can bend due to pressure.
A
<How to attach the coil>
Hold the lower part of the main body (shown as A) firmly so that
the main body does not move and attach the coil by inserting it
downward into the main body. Then securely attach the coil stopper to pipe B. (At this time, be careful that stress is not added to
lead wire and main body is not wound by lead wire.) If the stopper is not firmly attached to pipe B, coil may be detached from
the main body and that can cause defective operation of linear
expansion valve.
To prevent piping stress, be sure to attach the coil holding the
main body of linear expansion valve firmly. Otherwise pipe may
break.
B
A
Be sure to attach the
stopper to pipe B.
67
(4) How to attach and detach the coil of linear expansion valve (RP100-RP250)
<Composition>
Linear expansion valve is separable into the main body and the coil as shown in the diagram below.
Stopper
Main body
Coil
Lead wire
<How to detach the coil>
Hold the lower part of the main body (shown as A) firmly so that
the main body does not move and detach the coil by pulling it
upward.
Be sure to detach the coil holding main body firmly. Otherwise
pipes can bend due to pressure.
A
<How to attach the coil>
Hold the lower part of the main body (shown as A) firmly so that
the main body does not move and attach the coil by inserting it
downward into the main body. Then securely attach the coil stopper to main body. (At this time, be careful that stress is not added
to lead wire and main body is not wound by lead wire.) If the
stopper is not firmly attached to main body, coil may be detached
from the main body and that can cause defective operation of linear expansion valve.
To prevent piping stress, be sure to attach the coil holding the
main body of linear expansion valve firmly. Otherwise pipe may
break.
Be sure to attach
the stopper.
A
68
10-8. EMERGENCY OPERATION
(1) When the error codes shown below are displayed on outdoor unit or microcomputer for wired remote controller or indoor
unit has a failure, but no other problems are found, emergency operation will be available by setting the emergency operation switch (SWE) to ON and short-circuiting the connector (CN31) on outdoor controller board.
●When following abnormalities occur, emergency operation will be available.
Error code Inspected content
U4
Open/short of pipe thermistor (TH3/TH6/TH7/TH8)
E8
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error •Signal receiving error (Outdoor unit)
E9
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error •Transmitting error (Indoor unit)
E0 ~ E7
Ed
Communication error other than outdoor unit
Communicaiton error between outdoor controller board and M-NET board (Serial communication error)
(2) Check the following items and cautions for emergency operation
1Make sure that there is no abnormality in outdoor unit other than the above abnormalities. (Emergency operation will
not be available when error code other than the above are indicated.)
2For emergency operation, it is necessary to set the emergency operation switch (SWE) on indoor controller board. Refer
to the electrical wiring diagram of indoor unit for how to set the indoor unit.
3During emergency operation, the air-conditioner will continuously be operated by supplying power and stopping it: It can
not be turned on or off by remote control, and temperature control is not possible.
4Do not perform emergency heating operation for an extended period of time: If the outdoor unit starts defrosting during
this period, cold air will blow out from the indoor unit.
5Do not perform emergency cooling operation for more than 10 hours: Neglecting this could result in freezing the heat
exchanger in indoor unit.
(3) Emergency operation procedure
1Turn the main power supply off.
2Turn on the emergency operation switch (SWE) on indoor controller board.
3Set the shorting pins of emergency operation connector (CN31) on outdoor controller board to ON.
4Use SW4-2 on outdoor controller board to set the operation mode (cooling or heating). (SW4-1 is not used.)
CN31
SW4
ON
1
2
Heating
ON
Cooling
OFF
Shorting pins
5Turning the main power supply on will start the emergency operation.
(4) Releasing emergency operation
1Turn the main power supply off.
2Set the emergency operation switch (SWE) on indoor controller board to OFF.
3Set the shorting pins of emergency operation connector (CN31) on outdoor controller
board to OFF.
4Set SW4-2 on outdoor controller board as shown in the right.
wIf shorting pins are not set on emergency operation connector (CN31), the setting remains OFF.
69
SW4
Heating
ON
1
2
Cooling
(5) Operation data during emergency operation
During emergency operation, no communication is performed with the indoor unit, so the data items needed for operation
are set to the following values:
Operation mode
Operation data
Remarks
COOL
HEAT
Intake temperature (TH1)
27
20.5
—
Indoor pipe temperature (TH2)
5
45
—
Indoor 2-phase pipe temperature (TH5)
5
50
—
Set temperature
25
22
—
Outdoor pipe temperature (TH3)
45
5
(+1)
Outdoor discharge pipe temperature (TH4)
80
80
(+1)
Outdoor 2-phase pipe temperature (TH6)
50
5
(+1)
Outdoor ambient temperature (TH7)
35
7
(+1)
Temperature difference code
(room temperature - set temperature) (∆Tj)
Discharge superheat (SHd)
5
5
30deg
30deg
(+2)
Sub-cool (SC)
5deg
5deg
(+2)
—
+1: If the thermistor temperature data is normal (not open/short), that data is loaded into the control as valid data.
When the unit enters emergency operation and TH values are mismatched, set the thermistors to open/short.
And the unit runs emergency operation with the values listed above.
+2: If one thermistor is set to open/short, the values for SHd/SC will be different from the list above.
[Example] When liquid temperature thermistor (TH3) has an open or short circuit.
Thermistor
COOL
HEAT
TH3
45
5
Ta
Tb
TH6
TH4
Regard normal figure as effective data.
Tc
Td
Regard normal figure as effective data.
TH5
5
50
TH2
5
45
Discharge superheat (SHd)
Cooling = TH4 - TH6 = Tc - Ta
Heating = TH4 - TH5 = Td - 50
Degree of subcooling (SC)
Cooling = TH6- TH3 = Ta -45
Heating = TH5- TH2 = 50 - 45 = 5 deg.
70
10-9. TEST POINT DIAGRAM
Outdoor controller circuit board
PUHZ-RP35/50/60/71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100/125/140VKA
PUHZ-RP100/125/140/200/250YKA
CN51
CNDM
SW1
Forced defrost,
detect history
record reset,
refrigerant address
<CAUTION> TEST POINT1 is high voltage.
SW7
Demand control setting
1 to 2: Input of low-level sound priority mode
1 to 3: Input of external contact point
External signal output
• Compressor operating signal
• Abnormal signal
CN52C
SW6
(Connect to the noise
filter circuit board
(CN52C)) (RP35-140V)
Model select
SW4
Test operation
SWP
Pump down
LEV-C
SW5
Linear expansion valve
(For RP140)
Function switch
SW8
Pipe replace
Wiring replace
CN4
Transmission to outdoor power circuit
board (CN4)
CNM
Connect to A control
service tool
CNMNT
Connect to
M-NET adapter (CN5)
CNVMNT
Connect to
M-NET adapter (CND)
LEV-A,B
Linear expansion
valve
21S4
Four-way valve
TH4
Thermistor
<Discharge>
TH3
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
CN2
Connect to the outdoor
power circuit board (CN2)
1-5: Reception from
power circuit board
2-5: Zero cross signal
(0-5V DC)
3,4: Not used
6-5: 16V DC
7-5: 16V DC
TH7/6
Thermistor
<Outdoor/
2-phase pipe>
63H
High pressure
switch
TH32
Thermistor <Shell>
TH33
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
(For RP35-140)
CNAC
2 to 4: Power supply for
outdoor controller circuit
board (220V-240V AC)
1 to 3: Power supply for
indoor and outdoor unit
connection wire
(220-240V AC)
VFG
(Voltage between
right pins of PC5C
and PC5D, pin 3
and pin 4)
(Same as
(CNF17(+)-4(-))
VSP
(Voltage between pins
of C5A, C5B): DC 0V
(when stopped), DC 1–
6.5V
(when operated)
CNS
S1-S2: 220-240V AC
CNF1, CNF2
Connect to the fan motor
1-4: 280V DC
5-4: 15V DC
6-4: 0-6.5V DC
7-4: 15V DC(When stopped)
7.5V DC(When operated)
(0V-15V pulse)
CNDC
+ -
280V DC
Communication power supply
(1+, 3-)
(Outdoor power circuit D71 Voltage
board for RP35-140V) 24V DC
(Noise filter circuit board
for RP100-250Y)
71
Outdoor noise filter circuit board
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
LI, NI
Voltage of 220-240V AC is input.
(Connect to the terminal block (TB1))
EI
Connect to the earth
E2
Connect to the earth
E3
Connect to the earth
CNAC1, CNAC2
220-240V AC
(Connect to the
outdoor controller circuit board
(CNAC))
CN5
Primary current
(Connect to the
outdoor power
circuit board
(CN5))
LO, NO
Voltage of
220-240V AC is
output.
(Connect to the ACL)
CN52C
52C relay signal
(Connect to the
outdoor controller
circuit board
(CN52C))
72
Outdoor noise filter circuit board
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
EI, E2
Connect to the earth
E3
Connect to
the earth
CNAC1, CNAC2
220-240V AC
(Connect to the
outdoor controller circuit board
(CNAC))
CN5
Primary current
(Connect to the
outdoor power
circuit board
(CN5))
CN52C
52C relay signal
(Connect to the
outdoor controller
circuit board
(CN52C))
LO, NO
Voltage of 220-240V AC is output.
(Connect ACL)
73
Outdoor noise filter circuit board
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
LI1, LI2, LI3, NI
POWER SUPPLY
LI1-LI2/LI-LI3/LI3-LI1 : AC380/400/415V input
LI1-NI/LI2-NI/LI3-NI : AC220/230/240V input
(Connect to the terminal block (TB1))
GD1
Connect to the earth
GD3
Connect to the earth
CNAC1, CNAC2
AC220/230/240V
(Connect to the
outdoor controller
circuit board (CNAC))
CNCT
Primary current
CNDC
(Connect to the
outdoor power
circuit board (CN5))
(Connect to the
outdoor controller
circuit board
(CNDC))
CNL
Connect to the ACL4
NO
Connect to the
outdoor converter
circuit board (N-IN)
LO1, LO2, LO3
POWER SUPPLY
LO1-LO2/LO2-LO3/LO3-LO1: AC380/400/415V OUTPUT
(RP100-140: Connect to the outdoor converter circuit board and ACL (L1-IN,
ACL2, ACL3))
(RP200/250: Connect to the outdoor power circuit board (TB1-L1, L2, L3))
74
Outdoor power circuit board
PUHZ-RP35VHA4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
Brief Check of DIP-IPM and DIP-PFC
W Usually, they are in a state of being short-circuited if they are broken.
Measure the resistance in the following points (connectors, etc.). If they
are short-circuited, it means that they are broken.
1. Check of DIP-IPM
P2 - U , P2 - V , P2 - W , N2 - U , N2 - V , N2 - W
2. Check of DIP-PFC
P1 - L , P1 - N , L - N1 , N - N1
Note: The marks, L , N , N1 , N2 , P1 , P2 , U , V and W
shown in the diagram are not actually printed on the board.
R, S
Connect to the ACL
220-240V AC
U, V, W
Connect to the compressor (MC)
Voltage among phases: 5V to 180V AC
LD1-LD2
280-380V DC
Connect to
the outdoor
controller
circuit board
(CNDC)
DIP-PFC
LD9
Connect to
the earth
Only RP60,
71
DIP-IPM
CN2
Connect to the outdoor controller circuit board (CN2)
1-5: Outdoor power circuit board → Transmitting signal
to the outdoor controller circuit board (0-5V DC)
2-5: Zero cross signal (0-5V DC)
3-4: Not used
1, 2, 6, 7 : +
6-5: 16V DC
5:–
7-5: 16V DC
[
CN3
Thermistor
<Heatsink>
(TH8)
]
75
CN4
Connect from the
outdoor controller
circuit board
(CN4)
CN5
Primary current detection
(Connect to the outdoor
noise filter circuit board
(CN5))
Outdoor power circuit board
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
CN4
Connect to the outdoor
controller circuit board (CN4)
N2
CN2
Connect to the outdoor controller circuit board (CN2)
1-5: Transmitting signal to outdoor controller circuit
board (0-5 V DC)
2-5: Zero cross signal (0-5 V DC)
3-4: 18 V DC
6-5: 16 V DC
7-5: 16 V DC
CN52C
CNDC
Connect to the smoothing
capacitor CB -
52C driving signal
Connect to the outdoor
controller circuit board
(CN52C)
U/V/W
P2
Connect to the compressor (MC) Voltage among
phases: 10 V-180 V AC
Connect to the smooth- Connect to DCL Connect to the
ing capacitor CB +
earth
DCL1, DCL2
EI, E4
76
280-380 V DC (1+, 3-)
Connect to the outdoor
controller circuit board
E2, E3
(CNDC)
Connect to the earth
CNAC1, CNAC2
NI, LI
220-240 V AC
Connect to the outdoor controller circuit
board (CNAC)
Voltage of 220-240 V AC
is input (Connect to the
terminal block (TB1))
Outdoor power circuit board
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP250YKA
CN5
CN4
Detection of
primary current
(Connect to the
outdoor noise filter
circuit board (CNCT))
Connect to the
outdoor controller
circuit board
(CN4)
Brief Check of POWER MODULE
W Usually, they are in a state of being short-circuited if they are broken.
Measure the resistance in the following points (connectors, etc.).
If they are short-circuited, it means that they are broken.
1. Check of POWER MODULE
1.Check of DIODE circuit
L1 - P1 , L2 - P1 , L3 - P1 , L1 - N1 , L2 - N1 , L3 - N1
2.Check of IGBT circuit
P2 - U , P2 - V , P2 - W , N2 - U , N2 - V , N2 - W
Note: The marks, L1 , L2 , L3 , N1 , N2 , P1 , P2 , U , V and W
shown in the diagram are not actually printed on the board.
CN2
Connect to the outdoor controller circuit
board (CN2)
1-5: Power circuit board → Transmitting
signal to the controller board (0-5V DC)
2-5: Zero cross signal (0-5V DC)
1, 2, 6, 7 : + ]
3-4: Not used [ 5 : –
6-5: 16V DC
7-5: 16V DC
CN7
Connect to the
outdoor converter
circuit board
(CN7)
TB-U, TB-V,
TB-W
W
W
Connect to the
compressor (MC)
Voltage among
phases:
10V-400V AC
W
L3
L2
L1
P1
P2
TAB connecter
on X52A
Connect to the
RS resistor
N1
N2
TB-L1, TB-L2, TB-L3
Connect to the
outdoor converter
circuit board
(L1-OU, L2-OU,
L3-OU) (RP100-140)
Connect to the outdoor
noise filter circuit board
(LO1, LO2, LO3)
(RP200/250)
380V-415V AC
TB-N1
Connect to the
smoothing capacitor
CB2 – , CK capacitor
(CK capacitor only for
RP100-140)
TB-P2
TB-C1
Connect to the smoothing
capacitor CB1 +
Connect to the
smoothing capacitor
CB1 – , CB2 +
77
POWER
MODULE
Outdoor converter circuit board
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
CK-OU
Connect to the CK capacitor
L1-IN, N-IN
L1-A1
Connect to the noise filter
circuit board (LO1, No)
Connect to the ACL1
CN7
Connect to the
outdoor power
circuit board
(CN7)
L1-A2, L2-A2, L3-A2
Connect to the ACL1, ACL2, ACL3
78
L1-OU, L2-OU, L3-OU
Connect to the outdoor power circuit board
(TB-L1, L2, L3)
Outdoor M-NET board (optional)
LED4
LED3
Receiving Transmitting
CN2M
Connect to M-NET
LED5
Energizing
display of
M-NET board
(12V power
supply)
LED3
Outdoor unit
connecting display
CN5
Serial
communication
with outdoor board
SW1
Switch for
communication
display between
M-NET and board
LED1
Energizing
display of
M-NET board
(5V power
supply)
CND
Power supply (5V/12V) input
2 to 3 5V DC Input
1, 2 : +
1 to 3 12V DC Input
3:–
)[
SW12
M-NET address
(10s digit)
]
79
SW11
M-NET address (1s digit)
)
10-10. FUNCTION OF SWITCHES, CONNECTORS AND JUMPERS
(1) Function of switches
Type
of Switch No.
switch
1
Forced defrost +1
2
Abnormal history clear
3
Dip
switch
SW1
Action by the switch operation
Function
4
Refrigerant address setting
5
ON
OFF
Start
Normal
Clear
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
0
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
2
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
3
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
4
1 2 3 4 5 6
5
1 2 3 4 5 6
6
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
8
ON
6
SW4
Push
switch
Normal
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
9
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
12
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
10
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
13
When compressor is working
in heating operation. +1
off or operating
When power supply ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
11
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
14
1 2 3 4 5 6
15
1
Test run
Operating
OFF
2
Test run mode setting
Heating
Cooling
Pump down
Start
Normal
SWP
Effective timing
Under suspension
Under suspension
w1 Forced defrost should be done as follows.
1Change the DIP SW1-1 on the outdoor controller board from OFF to ON.
2Forced defrost will start by the above operation 1 if all these conditions written below are satisfied.
• Heat mode setting
• 10 minutes have passed since compressor started operating or previous compulsory defrosting finished.
• Pipe temperature is less than or equal to 8:.
Forced defrost will finish if certain conditions are satisfied.
Forced defrost can be done if above conditions are satisfied when DIP SW1-1 is changed from OFF to ON.
After DIP SW1-1 is changed from OFF to ON, there is no problem if DIP SW1-1 is left ON or changed to OFF again.
This depends on the service conditions.
80
Type of
Switch
Swich No.
SW5
SW7
w4
SW8
Dip
switch
SW9
Action by the switch operation
ON
OFF
—
—
Function
1
No function
2
Power failure
automatic recovery w2
3,4,5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3,4
No function
Model select
Mode select w3
No function
Max Hz setting (cooling)
Max Hz setting (heating)
Breaker capacity setting w5
Defrost setting
No function
No function
No function
No function
Function switch
No function
1
Auto recovery
ON
OFF
50
3
ON
OFF
60
4
ON
OFF
71
ON
OFF
100V
SW5-6
SW6
ON
OFF
35
Model select
No auto recovery
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
200Y
8
250Y
SW5
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
125V
140V
ON
OFF
MODEL
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
SW5-6
SW6
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
SW6
MODEL
MODEL
1 2 3 4 5 6
6
7
When power supply ON
—
—
Following SW5-6 reference
Demand function
Low noise mode
Always
—
—
—
Max Hz (cooling) o 0.8
Normal
Always
Max Hz (heating) o 0.8
Normal
Always
16A
25A
When power supply ON
For high humidity
Normal
Always
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Valid
Normal
Always
—
—
—
2
5
—
—
MODEL
SW6
Effective timing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
125Y
ON
OFF
140Y
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6
SW5-6
SW6
100Y
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
SW5-6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
w2 ‘Power failure automatic recovery’ can be set by either remote controller or this DIP SW. If one of them is set to ON, ‘Auto
recovery’ activates. Please set “Auto recovery” basically by remote controller because all units do not have DIP SW.
Please refer to the indoor unit installation manual.
w3 SW7-1 is setting change over of Demand/Low noise. It is effective only in case of external input.
(Local wiring is necessary. Refer to next page: Special function)
w4 Please do not use SW7-3~6 usually. Trouble might be caused by the usage condition.
w5 With this switch setting, the capacity decreases up to 30% under peak load condition. Thus this setting is recommended
only for Air to water purposes.
81
(2) Function of connector
Action by open/ short operation
Types
Connector
Function
Connector
CN31
Emergency operation
Short
Open
Start
Normal
Effective timing
When power supply ON
Special function
(a) Low-level sound priority mode (Local wiring)
By performing the following modification, operation noise of the outdoor unit can be reduced by about 3-4 dB.
The low noise mode will be activated when a commercially available timer or the contact input of an ON/OFF switch is added to
the CNDM connector (option) on the control board of the outdoor unit.
• The ability varies according to the outdoor temperature and conditions, etc.
1 Complete the circuit as shown when using the external input adapter (PAC-SC36NA). (Option)
2 SW7-1 (Outdoor unit control board): OFF
3 SW1 ON: Low noise mode
SW1 OFF: Normal operation
A
C
X
X
D
Orange
Brown
SW1
CNDM
1
Red
3
A Circuit diagram example
(low noise mode)
B On-site arrangement
C External input adapter
(PAC-SC36NA)
X: Relay
D Outdoor unit control board
E Max. 10 m
F Power supply for relay
(b) On demand control (Local wiring)
By performing the following modification, energy consumption can be reduced to 0–100% of the normal consumption.
The demand function will be activated when a commercially available timer or the contact input of an ON/OFF switch is added to
the CNDM connector (option) on the control board of the outdoor unit.
1 Complete the circuit as shown when using the external input adapter (PAC-SC36NA). (Option)
2 By setting SW7-1 on the control board of the outdoor unit, the energy consumption (compared to the normal consumption) can
be limited as shown below.
SW7-1
Demand
function
ON
SW2
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
A
SW3
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Energy consumption
100%
75%
50%
0% (Stop)
C
X
Y
SW2
SW3
Orange
X
Brown
Red
Y
D
CNDM
1
3
A Circuit diagram example
(Demand function)
B On-site arrangement
X, Y: Relay
82
C External input adapter
(PAC-SC36NA)
D Outdoor unit control board
E Max. 10 m
F Power supply for relay
<Display function of inspection for outdoor unit>
The blinking patterns of both LED1 (green) and LED2 (red) indicate the types of abnormality when it occurs. Types of
abnormality can be indicated in details by connecting an optional part ‘A-Control Service Tool (PAC-SK52ST)’ to connector
CNM on outdoor controller board.
[Display]
(1)Normal condition
Unit condition
When the power is turned on
When unit stops
When compressor is warming up
When unit operates
Outdoor controller board
A-Control Service Tool
LED1 (Green)
LED2 (Red)
Error code
Lighted
Lighted
Lighted
Lighted
Lighted
Not lighted
Not lighted
Lighted
00, etc.
08, etc.
C5, H7 etc.
Indication of the display
Alternately blinking display
Operation mode
(2)Abnormal condition
Indication
Outdoor controller board
LED1 (Green) LED2 (Red)
Error
Contents
Error
code
+1
1 blinking 2 blinking
Connector (63H) is open.
2 blinking 1 blinking Miswiring of indoor/outdoor unit conne-
cting wire, excessive number of indoor
units (4 units or more)
Miswiring of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire (converse wiring or disconnection)
Startup time over
2 blinking Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
(signal receiving error) is detected by indoor unit.
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
(transmitting error) is detected by indoor
unit.
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
(signal receiving error) is detected by
outdoor unit.
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
(transmitting error) is detected by outdoor
unit.
3 blinking Remote controller signal receiving
error is detected by remote controller.
F5
Inspection method
Check if connector (63H) on the outdoor controller board is
not disconnected.
Check continuity of pressure switch (63H) by tester.
Detailed
reference
page
P.41
— Check if indoor/outdoor connecting wire is connected correctly. P.42
Check if 4 or more indoor units are connected to outdoor unit. (EA)
— Check if noise entered into indoor/outdoor connecting wire P.42
or power supply.
(Eb)
Re-check error by turning off power, and on again.
P.42
—
(EC)
E6 Check if indoor/outdoor connecting wire is connected correctly. P.47
E7
—
Check if noise entered into indoor/outdoor connecting wire or
power supply.
Check if noise entered into indoor/outdoor controller board.
Re-check error by turning off power, and on again.
P.47
P.47
(E8)
—
P.47
(E9)
E0 Check if connecting wire of indoor unit or remote controller P.46
is connected correctly.
Remote controller transmitting error
is detected by remote controller.
E3 Check if noise entered into transmission wire of remote
P.47
Remote controller signal receiving
error is detected by indoor unit.
E4
P.47
Remote controller transmitting error
is detected by indoor unit.
E5
4 blinking Error code is not defined.
controller.
Re-check error by turning off power, and on again.
P.47
EF Check if remote controller is MA remote controller(PAR-21MAA).
P.48
Ed Check if connector (CN4) on outdoor controller board and
P.48
A0~A8
P.49~
P.52
Check if noise entered into transmission wire of remote controller.
Check if noise entered into indoor/outdoor connecting wire.
Re-check error by turning off power, and on again.
5 blinking Serial communication error
<Communication between outdoor
controller board and outdoor power
board>
<Communication between outdoor
controller board and M-NET p.c. board>
Communication error of M-NET
system
outdoor power board is not disconnected.
Check if there is poor connection of connector on outdoor
controller board(CNMNT and CNVMNT).
Check M-NET communication signal.
1.Error code displayed on remote controller
83
Indication
Outdoor controller board
LED1 (Green) LED2 (Red)
Error
Error
Contents
code
+1
3 blinking 1 blinking Abnormality of shell thermistor(TH32) U2
and discharging temperature (TH4)
Abnormality of superheat due
U7
to low discharge temperature
2 blinking Abnormal high pressure (High
pressure switch 63H worked.)
3 blinking Abnormality of outdoor fan
motor rotational speed
Protection from overheat operation(TH3)
4 blinking Compressor overcurrent
breaking(Start-up locked)
Compressor overcurrent breaking
Abnormality of current sensor (P.B.)
Abnormality of power module
5 blinking Open/short of discharge thermistor (TH4)
and shell thermistor (TH32)
4 blinking 1 blinking Abnormality of room temperature thermistor (TH1)
Abnormality of pipe temperature thermistor /Liquid (TH2)
Abnormality of pipe temperature
thermistor/Condenser-Evaporator
2 blinking Abnormality of drain sensor (DS)
Float switch(FS) connector open
Detailed
reference
page
Check if stop valves are open.
Check if connectors (TH4, TH32, LEV-A, and LEV-B) on outdoor controller
board are not disconnected.
Check if unit is filled with specified amount of refrigerant.
Measure resistance values among terminals on indoor valve and
outdoor linear expansion valve using a tester.
U1 Check if indoor/outdoor units have a short cycle on their air ducts.
Check if connector (63H) on outdoor controller board is not disconnected.
Check if heat exchanger and filter is not dirty.
Measure resistance values among terminals on linear expansion valve
using a tester.
P.43
U8 Check the outdoor fan motor.
P.45
Ud
UF Check if stop valves are open.
P.45
Check if connector (TH3) on outdoor controller board is disconnected.
Check looseness, disconnection, and converse connection of
compressor wiring.
UP Measure resistance values among terminals on compressor using a tester.
Check if outdoor unit has a short cycle on its air duct.
P.44
P.43
P.46
P.46
P.44
P.44
board and connector (CN3) on outdoor power board are not disconnected.
P.44
Measure resistance value of outdoor thermistors.
UH
U6
U3 Check if connectors(TH3,TH4,TH6 ,TH7 and TH32)on outdoor controller
Open/short of outdoor thermistors U4
(TH3, TH6, TH7 and TH8)
6 blinking Abnormality of heatsink
temperature
7 blinking Abnormality of voltage
Inspection method
U5 Check if indoor/outdoor units have a short cycle on their air ducts.
P.44
U9 Check looseness, disconnection, and converse connection of
P.45
Measure resistance value of outdoor thermistor(TH8).
compressor wiring.
Measure resistance value among terminals on compressor using a tester.
Check the continuity of contactor (52C).
Check if power supply voltage decreases.
Check the wiring of CN52C.
Check the wiring of CNAF.
P1 Check if connectors (CN20, CN21, CN29 and CN44) on indoor
controller board are not disconnected.
P2 Measure resistance value of indoor thermistors.
P9
2
2
2
P4 Check if connector (CN31)(CN4F) on indoor controller board is not
2
disconnected.
Measure resistance value of indoor thermistors.
Measure
resistance value among terminals on drain pump using
Indoor drain overflow protection P5
a tester.
Check if drain pump works.
Check drain function.
3 blinking Freezing (cooling)/overheating P6 Check if indoor unit has a short cycle on its air duct.
Check if heat exchanger and filter is not dirty.
(heating) protection
Measure resistance value on indoor and outdoor fan motors.
2
4 blinking Abnormality of pipe
temperature
2
Check if the inside of refrigerant piping is not clogged.
P8 Check if indoor thermistors(TH2 and TH5) are not disconnected from holder.
Check if stop valve is open.
Check converse connection of extension pipe. (on plural units connection)
Check if indoor/outdoor connecting wire is connected correctly.
(on plural units connection)
1 Error code displayed on remote controller
2 Refer to service manual for indoor unit.
84
<Outdoor unit operation monitor function>
[When optional part ‘A-Control Service Tool (PAC-SK52ST)’ is connected to outdoor controller board (CNM)]
Digital indicator LED1 displays 2 digit number or code to inform operation condition and the meaning of error code by
controlling DIP SW2 on ‘A-Control Service Tool’.
Operation indicator
SW2 : Indicator change of self diagnosis
Unit
Explanation for display
Display detail
SW2 setting
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
<Digital indicator LED1 working details>
(Be sure that the 1 to 6 in the SW2 are set to OFF.)
(1) Display when the power supply ON
When the power supply ON, blinking displays by turns.
Wait for 4 minutes at the longest.
(2) When the display lights (Normal operation)
1Operation mode display.
1 second
interval
SW2
(Lighting)
ON
LED1
(Initial setting)
1 2 3 4 5 6
The ones digit : Relay output
Warming-up
Display Compressor Compressor 4-way valve Solenoid valve
The tens digit : Operation mode
Display
Operation Model
O
OFF / FAN
C
COOLING / DRY +
H
HEATING
d
DEFROSTING
wC5 is displayed during replacement operation.
2Display during error postponement
Postponement code is displayed when
compressor stops due to the work of
protection device.
Postponement code is displayed while
error is being postponed.
0
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
ON
2
—
—
ON
—
3
—
—
ON
ON
4
—
ON
—
—
5
—
ON
—
ON
6
—
ON
ON
—
7
—
ON
ON
ON
8
ON
—
—
—
A
ON
—
ON
—
(3) When the display blinks
Inspection code is displayed when compressor stops due to the work of protection devices.
Display Inspection unit
0
Outdoor unit
1
Indoor unit 1
2
Indoor unit 2
3
Indoor unit 3
Display
F5
E8
E9
EA
Eb
EC
E0~E7
Display
U1
U2
U3
U4
U5
U6
U7
U8
Ud
UF
UH
UL
UP
P1~P8
A0~A7
Contents to be inspected (During operation)
Abnormal high pressure (63H worked)
Abnormal high discharging temperature and shell thermistor, shortage of refrigerant
Open/short circuit of discharging thermistor(TH4) and shell thermistor(TH32)
Open/short of outdoor unit thermistors(TH3, TH6, TH7 and TH8)
Abnormal temperature of heatsink
Abnormality of power module
Abnormality of superheat due to low discharge temperature
Abnormality in outdoor fan motor
Overheat protection
Compressor overcurrent interruption (When Comp. locked)
Current sensor error
Abnormal low pressure
Compressor overcurrent interruption
Abnormality of indoor units
Communication error of M-NET system
Contents to be inspected (When power is turned on)
63H connector(yellow) is open.
Indoor/outdoor communication error (Signal receiving error) (Outdoor unit)
Indoor/outdoor communication error (Transmitting error) (Outdoor unit)
Miswiring of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire, excessive number of indoor units (4 units or more)
Miswiring of indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire(converse wiring or disconnection)
Startup time over
Communication error except for outdoor unit
85
SW2 setting
ON
Explanation for display
Display detail
Pipe temperature / Liquid(TH3)
– 40~90
1 2 3 4 5 6
– 40~90
(When the coil thermistor detects 0: or below, “–”
and temperature are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When -10:;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
Unit
:
10
Discharge temperature (TH4)
3~217
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
3~217
(When the discharge thermistor detects 100: or
more, hundreds digit, tens digit and ones digit are
displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 105:;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
05
:
Output step of outdoor FAN
0~10
0~10
The number of ON / OFF times of compressor
0~9999
0~9999
(When the number of times is 100 or more,
hundreds digit, tens digit and ones digit are
displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 42500 times (425 ×100 times);
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
4
25
100 times
0~9999
(When it is 100 hours or more, hundreds digit, tens
digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 2450 hours (245 ×10 hours);
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
2
45
10 hours
Step
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Compressor integrating operation times
0~9999
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Compressor operating current
0~50
0~50
wOmit the figures after the decimal fractions.
Compressor operating frequency
0~255
0~255
(When it is 100Hz or more, hundreds digit, tens
digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.
(Example) When 125Hz;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
25
Hz
0~480
(When it is 100 pulse or more, hundreds digit, tens
digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.
(Example) When 150 pulse;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
50
Pulse
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
LEV-A opening pulse
0~480
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Error postponement code history (1)
of outdoor unit
Postponement code display
Blinking: During postponement
Lighting: Cancellation of postponement
“00” is displayed in case of no postponement.
Operation mode on error occurring
Operation mode of when operation stops due to
error is displayed by setting SW2 like below.
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
(SW2)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
86
Code
display
Code
display
SW2 setting
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Explanation for display
Display detail
Pipe temperature / Liquid (TH3) on error – 40~90
occurring
(When the coil thermistor detects 0: or below, “–”
– 40~90
and temperature are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When –15:;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
15
Compressor temperature (TH4) or
discharge temperature (TH4) on error
occurring
3~217
3~217
(When the temperature is 100: or more, the
hundreds digit, tens digit and ones digit are
displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 130:;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
30
Compressor operating current on error
occurring
0~50
0~50
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Unit
:
:
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Error code history (1) (latest)
Alternate display of abnormal unit
number and code
When no error history,
“ 0 ” and “– –” are displayed by turns.
Error code history (2)
Alternate display of error unit number
and code
When no error history,
“ 0 ” and “– –” are displayed by turns.
Thermostat ON time
0~999
0~999
(When it is 100 minutes or more, the hundreds digit,
tens digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 245 minutes;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
2
45
Code
display
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Code
display
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
Test run elapsed time
0~120
0~120
(When it is 100 minutes or more, the hundreds digit,
tens digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 105 minutes;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
05
87
Minute
Minute
SW2 setting
Explanation for display
Display detail
The number of connected indoor units
ON
0~4
(The number of connected indoor units are displayed.)
Unit
Unit
1 2 3 4 5 6
Capacity setting display
Displayed as an outdoor capacity code.
Capacity Code
Capacity
Code
RP35V
9
RP100V, 100Y
20
RP50V
10 RP125V, 125Y
25
RP60V
11 RP140V, 140Y
28
RP71V
14 RP200Y
40
RP250Y
50
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
Outdoor unit setting information
ON
• The tens digit (Total display for applied setting)
Setting details
Display details
H·P / Cooling only
0 : H·P
Single phase / 3 phase
0 : Single phase 2 : 3 phase
• The ones digit
Setting details
1 2 3 4 5 6
Code
display
1 : Cooling only
Display details
Defrosting switch 0 : Normal
Code
display
1 : For high humidity
(Example) When heat pump, 3 phase and defrosting
(normal) are set up, “20” is displayed.
ON
Indoor pipe temperature / Liquid (TH2(1)) – 39~88
(When the temperature is 0: or less, “–” and
Indoor 1
temperature are displayed by turns.)
– 39~88
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Indoor pipe temperature / Cond. / Eva.
(TH5(1))
Indoor 1
– 39~88
– 39~88
(When the temperature is 0: or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Indoor pipe temperature / Liquid (TH2(2)) – 39~88
Indoor 2
(When the temperature is 0: or less, “–” and
– 39~88
temperature are displayed by turns.)
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Indoor pipe temperature / Cond. / Eva.
(TH5(2))
Indoor 2
– 39~88
– 39~88
(When the temperature is 0: or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
Indoor room temperature (TH1)
8~39
8~39
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
88
SW2 setting
ON
Explanation for display
Display detail
Indoor setting temperature
17~30
17~30
Outdoor pipe temperature / 2-phase
(TH6)
-39~88
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0: or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
Outdoor ambient temperature (TH7)
-39~88
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0: or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
Unit
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Outdoor heatsink temperature (TH8)
-40~200
-40~200
(When the temperature is 0: or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
(When the thermistor detects 100: or more,
hundreds digit, tens digit and ones digit are
displayed by turns.)
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
:
0~255
(When the temperature is 100°C or more, hundreds
digit, tens digit and ones digit are displayed by
turns.)
Discharge superheat SHd
0~255
Cooling = TH4-TH6
Heating = TH4-TH5
0~130
(When the temperature is 100°C or more, hundreds
digit, tens digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
Sub cool. SC
0~130
Cooling = TH6-TH3
Heating = TH5-TH2
Input current of outdoor unit
°C
°C
0~500
(When it is 100 or more, hundreds digit, tens digit
and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
0.1 A
0~480
(When it is 100 pulse or more, hundreds digit, tens
digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
Pulse
1 2 3 4 5 6
LEV-B opening pulse
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Description
U9 Error status during the Error
postponement period
Normal
Overvoltage error
Undervoltage error
Input current sensor error
L1-phase open error
Abnormal power synchronous signal
PFC error (RP35-71)
(Overvoltage / Undervoltage / Overcurrent)
PFC/ IGBT error (RP35-140V)
Undervoltage
1 2 3 4 5 6
Detection point
—
Power circuit board
Controller circuit board
Display
00
01
02
Controller circuit board
04
Power circuit board
08
Power circuit board
10
Defective P.B.
20
Code
display
Display examples for multiple errors:
Overvoltage (01) + Undervoltage (02) = 03
Undervoltage (02) + Power-sync signal error (08) = 0A
L1 phase open error (04) + PFC error (10) = 14
ON
180~370(RP35~140V)
300~750(RP100~250Y)
(When it is 100V or more, hundreds digit, tens
digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
DC bus voltage
180~370(RP35~140V)
300~750(RP100~250Y)
1 2 3 4 5 6
89
V
SW2 setting
ON
Explanation for display
Display detail
Capacity save
0~100
When air conditioner is connected to
M-NET and capacity save mode is
demanded, “0”~”100” is displayed.
1 2 3 4 5 6
0~100
(When the capacity is 100% hundreds digit, tens digit
and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 100%;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
00
Unit
%
When there is no setting
of capacity save “100” is
displayed.
ON
Error postponement code history (2)
of outdoor unit
Postponement code display
Blinking: During postponement
Lighting: Cancellation of postponement
“00” is displayed in case of no postponement.
Error postponement code history (3)
of outdoor unit
Postponement code display
Blinking: During postponement
Lighting: Cancellation of postponement
“00” is displayed in case of no postponement.
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Code
display
Code
display
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Error code history (3) (Oldest)
Alternate display of abnormal unit
number and code.
When no error history, “0” and “– –“ are displayed by
turns.
Error thermistor display
3:
6:
7:
8:
Code
display
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
When there is no error thermistor,
“–“ is displayed.
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
Outdoor
pipe temperature /Liquid (TH3)
pipe temperature /2-phase (TH6)
outside temperature (TH7)
heatsink (TH8)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Operation frequency on error occurring
0~255
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Fan step on error occurring
0~10
0~255
(When it is 100Hz or more, hundreds digit, tens digit
and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 125Hz;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
25
Code
display
Hz
0~10
Step
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Outdoor pipe temperature(TH33)
-39~88
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0: or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
1 2 3 4 5 6
90
:
SW2 setting
Explanation for display
Display detail
0~480
(When it is 100 pulse or more, hundreds digit, tens
digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 130 pulse;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
30
LEV-C opening pulse 0~480
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Indoor room temperature (TH1) on error
occurring
8~39
Unit
Pulse
8~39
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Indoor pipe temperature / Liquid (TH2)
on error occurring
-39~88
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Indoor pipe temperature / Cond./ Eva.
(TH5) on error occurring
-39~88
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0°C or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When –15°C;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
15
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0°C or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When –15°C;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
15
Outdoor pipe temperature / 2-phase
(TH6) on error occurring
-39~88
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0°C or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When –15°C;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
15
Outdoor ambient temperature (TH7) on
error occurring
-39~88
1 2 3 4 5 6
Outdoor heatsink temperature (TH8) on
error occurring
-40~200
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
91
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0°C or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When –15°C;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
15
-40~200
(When the temperature is 0°C or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
(When the temperature is 100°C or more, hundreds
digit, tens digit and ones digit are displayed by
turns.)
:
:
:
:
:
SW2 setting
Display detail
Explanation for display
Unit
Discharge superheat on error occurring
SHd
0~255
0~255
(When the temperature is 100°C or more, hundreds
digit, tens digit and ones digit are displayed by
turns.)
(Example) When 150°C;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
50
:
0~130
(When the temperature is 100°C or more, hundreds
digit, tens digit and ones digit are displayed by
turns.)
(Example) When 115°C;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
1
15
:
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
Cooling = TH4-TH6
Heating = TH4-TH5
Sub cool on error occurring SC
0~130
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Cooling = TH6-TH3
Heating = TH5-TH2
Thermo-on time until error stops
0~999
1 2 3 4 5 6
0~999
(When it is 100 minutes or more, hundreds digit, tens
digit and ones digit are displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 415 minutes;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
4
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Minute
15
Indoor pipe temperature / Liquid
(TH2 (3))
Indoor 3
-39~88
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0°C or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
Indoor pipe temperature / Cond./ Eva.
(TH5 (3))
Indoor 3
-39~88
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0°C or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
:
When there is no indoor unit, “00” is displayed.
Indoor pipe temperature / Liquid
(TH2 (4))
Indoor 4
-39~88
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0°C or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
Indoor pipe temperature / Cond. / Eva
(TH5 (4))
Indoor 4
-39~88
-39~88
(When the temperature is 0°C or less, “–” and
temperature are displayed by turns.)
:
:
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
When there is no indoor unit, “00” is displayed.
:
92
SW2 setting
Explanation for display
Display detail
Unit
The following code will be a help to know the
operating status of unit.
Controlling status of compressor
operating frequency
•The tens digit
Display Compressor operating frequency control
1
Primary current control
Secondary current control
2
•The ones digit (In this digit, the total number of
activated control is displayed.)
Display Compressor operating frequency control
Preventive control for excessive temp1
erature rise of discharge temperature
Preventive control for excessive temp2
erature rise of condensing temperature
4
Frosting preventing control
Preventive control for excessive temp8
erature rise of heatsink
(Example)
The following controls are activated.
LED
• Primary current control
• Preventive control for excessive temperature rise of condensing temperature
• Preventive control for excessive temperature rise of heatsink
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
Code
display
Comp.shell temperature (TH32)
3~217
3~217
(When the comp.shell thermistor detects 100°C or
more, hundreds digit, tens digit and ones digit are
displayed by turns.)
(Example) When 105°C;
0.5 secs. 0.5secs. 2 secs.
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
1
93
05
:
11
FUNCTION SETTING
11-1. UNIT FUNCTION SETTING BY THE REMOTE CONTROLLER
Each function can be set according to necessity using the remote controller. The setting of function for each unit can only be
done by the remote controller. Select function available from the table 1.
(1) Functions available when setting the unit number to 00 (Select 00 referring to 4 setting the indoor unit number.)
W1 The functions below are available only when the wired remote controller is used. The functions are not available for
floor standing models.
<Table 1> Function selections
Function
Mode No. Setting No.
Settings
Power failure
automatic recovery
Indoor temperature
detecting 1
OFF
ON
Average data from each indoor unit
Data from the indoor unit with remote controller
Data from main remote controller
LOSSNAY
Not supported
connectivity
Supported (Indoor unit does not intake outdoor air through LOSSNAY)
Supported (Indoor unit intakes outdoor air through LOSSNAY)
Power supply
240V
voltage
220V, 230V
Frost prevention
2 (Normal)
temperature
3
Humidifier control
When the compressor operates, the humidifier also operates.
When the fan operates, the humidifier also operates.
Change of
Standard
defrosting control
For high humidity
Refrigerant leakage 70%(RP35,50)/ 80%(RP60-140)
50%(RP35,50)/ 60%(RP60-140)
setting (%)
01
02
03
04
15
16
17
21
: Initial setting
(when sent from the factory)
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
Remarks
The setting is
applied to all
the units in the
same
refrigerant
system.
Meaning of "Function setting"
mode02:indoor temperature detecting
OUTDOOR
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
INDOOR
INDOOR
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
OUTDOOR
INDOOR
INDOOR
No Indoor temperature(ta)=
REMOTE
(MAIN)
No.1 Average data of the
sensor on all the
indoor units
Initial ta=(A+B)/2
setting
REMOTE
(SUB)
REMOTE
(MAIN)
REMOTE
(SUB)
REMOTE
(MAIN)
REMOTE
(SUB)
REMOTE
(MAIN)
ta=(A+B)/2
ta=A
ta=A
No.2 The data of the sensor
on the indoor unit that
connected
with remote controller
ta=A
ta=B
ta=A
ta=A
No.3 The data of the sensor
on main remote
controller.
ta=C
ta=C
ta=C
ta=C
94
(2) Functions available when setting the unit number to 01-03 or AL (07 in case of wireless remote controller)
• When setting functions for an indoor unit in an independent system, set the unit number to 01 referring to 4 setting the
indoor unit number of Operating Prodedure.
• When setting functions for a simultaneous- Twin Triple indoor unit system, set the unit number to 01 to 03 for each indoor
unit in case of selecting different functions for each unit referring to 4 setting the indoor unit number of Operating Prodedure.
• When setting the same functions for an entire simultaneous Twin Triple-indoor unit system, set refrigerant address to AL
(07 in case of wireless remote controller) referring to 4 setting the indoor unit number of Operating Prodedure.
Function
Mode Setting 4-Way Ceiling
No. No. cassette concealed
Settings
PLA-BA PEA-GA
Filter sign
Air flow
(Fan speed)
No.of air outlets
Optional high efficiency
filter
Vane setting
Energy saving air
flow (Heating mode)
Optional humidifier
(PLA only)
Vane differential setting
in heating mode
(cold wind prevention)
Swing
Set temperature in heating
mode (4 deg up) +1
Fan speed during the
heating thermo OFF
Fan speed during the
cooling thermo OFF
Detection of abnormality of
the pipe temperature (P8)
100h
2500h
No filter sign indicator
Quiet
Standard
High ceiling
4 directions
3 directions
2 directions
Not supported
Supported
No vanes (Vane No.3 setting : PLA only)
Vane No.1 setting
Vane No.2 setting
Disabled
Enabled
Not supported
Supported
No.1 setting (TH5: 24-28)
No.2 setting (Standard, TH5:28-32)
No.3 setting (TH5: 32-38)
Not available Swing
PLA-BA
Available
Wave air flow
Available
Not available
Extra low
Stop
Set fan speed
Set fan speed
Stop
Available
Not available
}
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
23
24
25
27
28
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
-
-
: Initial setting (Factory setting)
- : Not available
Wall
Ceiling suspended
mounted
PCA-KA
-
-
PCA-HA
PKA-HAL
-
-
Floor
standing
PKA-KAL
-
PSA-GA
-
-
w1. PKA-HAL/KAL: 2 deg up
PEAD-RP•JA(L)
Function
Filter sign
External static pressure
External static pressure
Set temperature in heating
mode (4 deg up)
Fan speed during the
heating thermo OFF
Fan speed during the
cooling thermo OFF
Detection of abnormality
of the pipe
Settings
100h
2500h
No filter sign indicator
35/50/70/100/150Pa
35/50/70/100/150Pa
Available
Not available
Extra low
Stop
Set fan speed
Set fan speed
Stop
Available
Not available
Mode Setting
No. No.
07
08
10
24
25
27
28
: Initial setting
(Factory setting)
1
2
3
Refer to the right table
Refer to the right table
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
1
2
95
Setting No.
Initial setting
External static
pressure
Mode No. 08 Mode No. 10 (Factory setting)
35Pa
1
2
50Pa
1
3
70Pa
2
1
100Pa
2
2
150Pa
2
3
11-1-1. Selecting functions using the wired remote controller
First, try to familiarize yourself with the flow of the function selection procedure. In this section, an example of setting the room
temperature detection position is given.
For actual operations, refer to steps to .
Setting number
Refrigerant address
Unit number
Mode number
Modes 01 to 14 can be activated
by pressing buttons and simultaneously, and modes 15 to
28 by pressing buttons and .
Selecting functions using the wired remote controller
Check the function selection setting.
Switch to function setting mode.
(Press and at the same time
with the remote controller stopped.)
For modes 15 and higher,
press and at the same time.
Specify refrigerant address 00 (outdoor unit)
Specify unit No. 00. (indoor unit)
(Use and .)
Enter the setting.
(Press .)
(Specified indoor unit:
FAN operation)
Select mode No. 02
(room temperature detection position).
Select setting No. 03 (remote controller fixed).
(Use and .)
Enter the setting.
(Press .)
Finished
Example:
Selecting room temperature
detection position
YES
NO
Change refrigerant
address or unit No.
NO
YES
End function display.
(Press and at the same time.)
The above procedure must be carried out only if changes are necessary.
96
[Operating Procedure]
Check the setting items provided by function selection.
If settings for a mode are changed by function selection, the functions of that mode will be changed accordingly. Check all the current settings according to steps to , fill in the "Check" column in Table 1, then change them as necessary. For initial settings, refer to the indoor unit's installation manual.
Switch off the remote controller.
Hold down the FILTER (
mode is 15 to 28)and TEST
buttons simultaneously for at least 2 seconds. FUNCTION
SELECTION will start to blink,
then the remote controller's display content will change as shown below.
Set the outdoor unit's refrigerant address.
Press the [ CLOCK] buttons (
and
) to select the desired
refrigerant address. The refrigerant address changes from "00" to "15".
(This operation is not possible for single refrigerant systems.)
Refrigerant address
display section
blinked for 2 seconds or "88" blinks in the room temperature display area for 2 seconds, a transmission error may have occurred.
* If the unit stops after FUNCTION
SELECTION
Check to see if there are any sources of noise or interference near the transmission path.
Note
If you have made operational mistakes during this procedure, exit function selection (see step ) then restart from step .
Set the indoor unit number.
Press the
area.
ON/OFF button so that "- -" blinks in the unit number display
and
) to select the unit number
Press the [ CLOCK] buttons (
of the indoor unit for which you want to perform function selection. The unit
number changes to "00", "01", "02","03",04" and "AL" each time a button is
pressed.
Unit number
display section
* To set modes 01 to 06 or 15 to 22, select unit number "00".
* To set modes 07 to 14 or 23 to 28, carry out as follows:
• To set each indoor unit individually, select " 01" to "04".
• To set all the indoor units collectively, select " AL".
When the refrigerant address and unit number are confirmed by pressing the
MODE button, the corresponding indoor unit will start fan operation. This
helps you find the location of the indoor unit for which you want to perform function
selection. However, if "00" or "AL" is selected as the unit number, all the indoor
units corresponding to the specified refrigerant address will start fan operation.
Check the refrigerant address and unit number.
Press the MODE button to confirm the refrigerant address and unit
number.
After a while, "- - " will start to blink in the mode number display area.
Example) When the refrigerant address is set to 00 and the unit number is 02.
00 refrigerant address
Outdoor unit
Mode number
display section
*
Indoor unit
"88" will blink in the room temperature display area if the selected refrigerant
address does not exist in the system.
Furthermore, if "F" appears and blinks in the unit number display area and the
refrigerant address display area also blinks, there are no units that correspond to the selected unit number. In this case, the refrigerant address and unit
number may be incorrect, so repeat steps and to set the correct ones.
Designate operation
*
Unit number 01
Unit number 02
Remote controller
Fan draft
Unit number 03
When grouping different refrigerant systems, if an indoor unit other than the
one to which the refrigerant address has been set to perform fan operation,
there may be another refrigerant address that is the same as the specified one.
In this case, check the DIP switch of the outdoor unit to see whether such a
refrigerant address exists.
Select the mode number.
TEMP] buttons (
and
) to set the desired mode
Press the [
number.
(Only the selectable mode numbers can be selected.)
Select the setting content for the selected mode.
Press the
MENU button. The currently selected setting number will
blink, so check the currently set content.
Setting number display section
Mode number
display section
Mode number 02 = Indoor tempreture detection
Press the [
number.
Setting number 1 = Indoor unit operating average
Register the settings you have made in steps to .
Press the MODE button. The mode number and setting number will start
to blink and registration starts.
TEMP] buttons (
and
) to select the desired setting
Setting number 3 = Remote controller built-in sensor
The mode number and setting number will stop blinking and remain lit, indicating the
end of registration.
* If " - - - " is displayed for both the mode number and setting number and "
" blinks in the room temperature display area, a transmission error may have occurred.
Check to see if there are any sources of noise or interference near the transmission path.
If you wish to continue to select other functions, repeat steps to .
Complete function selection.
Hold down the FILTER (
mode is 15 to 28) and TEST buttons
simultaneously for at least 2 seconds.
After a while, the function selection screen will disappear and the air conditioner OFF screen will reappear.
* Do not operate the remote controller for at least 30 seconds after completing
function selection. (No operations will be accepted even if they are made.)
Note
If a function of an indoor unit is changed by function selection after installation is complete, make sure that a " " mark, etc., is given in the "Check" column of Table
1 to indicate the change.
97
11-1-2. Selecting functions using the wireless remote controller (Type C)
Functions can be selected with the wireless remote controller. Function selection using wireless remote controller is available only for refrigerant system with wireless function. Refrigerant address cannot be specified by the wireless remote controller.
[Flow of function selection procedure]
The flow of the function selection procedure is shown below. This example shows how to turn
off the function that raises the set temperature by 4 degrees during HEAT operation.
The procedure is given after the flow chart.
Check the function selection setting.
CHECK
Switch to function selection mode.
(Enter address "50" in troubleshooting
mode, then press the HOUR button.)
TEMP
ON/OFF
MODE
FAN
AUTO STOP
VANE
AUTO START
CHECK LOUVER
h
min
TEST RUN
SET
Troubleshooting mode is the mode entered when
you press the INSPECT button twice to display
"INSPECT".
RESET
CLOCK
Specify unit No. "01" (since the function applies to unit 01).
(Set address "01" while still in troubleshooting mode, then press the MINUTE button.)
Note: You cannot specify the refrigerant address.
NO
Select mode No. "24" (function that raises set temperature by 4 degrees during HEAT operation).
(Set address "24" while still in troubleshooting mode, then press the HOUR button.)
YES
Change
unit No.
Select setting No. "02" (OFF).
(Set address "02" while still in troubleshooting mode, then press the HOUR button.)
Finished
NO
YES
End function selection mode. Note: When you switch to function selection mode
on the wireless remote controller's operation
(End troubleshooting mode.)
area, the unit ends function selection mode
automatically if nothing is input for 10 minutes
or longer.
[Operating instructions]
1 Check the function settings.
CHECK
2 Press the
button twice continuously. → CHECK is lit and “00” blinks.
Press the temp
button once to set “50”. Direct the wireless remote controller toward the receiver of the indoor unit and press
h
the
button.
3 Set the unit number.
Press the temp
button to set the unit number. (Press “01” to specify the indoor unit whose
unit number is 01.)
min
Direct the wireless remote controller toward the receiver of the indoor unit and press the
button.
min
By setting unit number with the
button, specified indoor unit starts performing fan operation.
Detect which unit is assigned to which number using this function. If unit number is set to AL, all the indoor units in same
refrigerant system start performing fan operation simultaneously.
* If a unit number that cannot be recognized by the unit is entered, 3 beeps of 0.4 seconds will be heard. Reenter the unit number
setting.
* If the signal was not received by the sensor, you will not hear a beep or a “double beep” may be heard. Reenter the unit number
setting.
4 Select a mode.
Press the temp
button to set a mode. Press “24” to turn on the function that raises the set temperature by 4 degree
h
during heat operation. Direct the wireless remote controller toward the sensor of the indoor unit and press the
button.
→ The sensor-operation indicator will flash and beeps will be heard to indicate the current setting number.
Current setting number: 1 = 1 beep (1 second)
2 = 2 beeps (1 second each)
3 = 3 beeps (1 second each)
* If a mode number that cannot be recognized by the unit is entered, 3 beeps of 0.4 seconds will be heard. Reenter the mode
number.
* If the signal was not received by the sensor, you will not hear a beep or, a “double beep” may be heard. Reenter the mode
number.
5 Select the setting number.
Press the temp
button to select the setting number. (02: Not available)
h
Direct the wireless remote controller toward the receiver of the indoor unit and press the
button.
→ The sensor-operation indicator will flash and beeps will be heard to indicate the the setting number.
Setting number: 1 = 2 beeps (0.4 seconds each)
2 = 2 beeps (0.4 seconds each, repeated twice)
3 = 2 beeps (0.4 seconds each, repeated 3 times)
* If a setting number that cannot be recognized by the unit is entered, the setting will turn back to the original setting.
* If the signal was not received by the sensor, you will not hear a beep or a “double beep” may be heard. Reenter the setting number.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to make an additional setting without changing unit number.
7 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to change unit number and make function settings on it.
8 Complete the function settings
Press
button.
* Do not use the wireless remote controller for 30 seconds after completing the function setting.
98
11-2. FUNCTION SELECTION OF REMOTE CONTROLLER
The setting of the following remote controller functions can be changed using the remote controller function selection mode.
Change the setting when needed.
Item 1
Item 2
1.Change Language
Language setting to display
("CHANGE LANGUAGE")
2.Function limit
(1) Operation function limit setting (operation lock) ("LOCKING FUNCTION")
("FUNCTION SELECTION") (2) Use of automatic mode setting ("SELECT AUTO MODE")
(3) Temperature range limit setting ("LIMIT TEMP FUNCTION")
3.Mode selection
(1) Remote controller main/sub setting ("CONTROLLER MAIN/SUB")
("MODE SELECTION")
(2) Use of clock setting ("CLOCK")
(3) Timer function setting ("WEEKLY TIMER")
(4) Contact number setting for error situation ("CALL.")
Item 3 (Setting content)
• Display in multiple languages is possible.
• Setting the range of operation limit (operation lock)
• Setting the use or non-use of "automatic" operation mode
• Setting the temperature adjustable range (maximum, minimum)
• Selecting main or sub remote controller
* When 2 remote controllers are connected to 1 group, 1 controller must be set to sub.
• Setting the use or non-use of clock function
• Setting the timer type
• Contact number display in case of error
• Setting the telephone number
(1) Temperature display /°F setting ("TEMP MODE /°F")
4.Display change
• Setting the temperature unit ( or °F) to display
("DISP MODE SETTING") (2) Room air temperature display setting ("ROOM TEMP DISP SELECT") • Setting the use or non-use of the display of indoor (suction) air temperature
(3) Automatic cooling/heating display setting ("AUTO MODE DISP C/H") • Setting the use or non-use of the display of "Cooling" or "Heating" display during
operation with automatic mode
[Function selection flowchart] Refer to next page.
[1] Stop the air conditioner to start remote controller function selection mode. → [2] Select from item1. → [3] Select from item2. → [4] Make the setting.
(Details are specified in item3) → [5] Setting completed. → [6] Change the display to the normal one. (End)
[Detailed setting]
[4] -1. CHANGE LANGUAGE setting
The language that appears on the dot display can be selected.
• Press the [ MENU] button to change the language.
Japanese (JP), English (GB), German (D), Spanish (E),
Russian (RU), Italian (I), Chinese (CH), French (F)
[4] -3. Mode selection setting
(1) Remote controller main/sub setting
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
Main : The controller will be the main controller.
Sub : The controller will be the sub controller.
(2) Use of clock setting
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
ON : The clock function can be used.
OFF : The clock function cannot be used.
[4] -2. Function limit
(1) Operation function limit setting (operation lock)
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
no1 : Operation lock setting is made on all buttons other than
the [ ON/OFF] button.
no2 : Operation lock setting is made on all buttons.
OFF (Initial setting value) : Operation lock setting is not made
* To make the operation lock setting valid on the normal screen, it is
necessary to press buttons (Press and hold down the [FILTER]
and [ ON/OFF] buttons at the same time for 2 seconds.) on
the normal screen after the above setting is made.
.
(3) Timer function setting
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button (Choose one of
the followings.).
WEEKLY TIMER (initial setting):
The weekly timer can be used.
AUTO OFF TIMER: The auto off timer can be used.
SIMPLE TIMER:
The simple timer can be used.
TIMER MODE OFF: The timer mode cannot be used.
* When the use of clock setting is OFF, the "WEEKLY TIMER" cannot be
used.
(2) Use of automatic mode setting
When the remote controller is connected to the unit that has automatic operation mode, the following settings can be made.
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
ON (Initial setting value) : The automatic mode is displayed when
the operation mode is selected.
OFF
: The automatic mode is not displayed
when the operation mode is selected.
(3) Temperature range limit setting
After this setting is made, the temperature can be changed within the
set range.
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
LIMIT TEMP COOL MODE :
The temperature range can be changed on cooling/dry mode.
LIMIT TEMP HEAT MODE :
The temperature range can be changed on heating mode.
LIMIT TEMP AUTO MODE :
The temperature range can be changed on automatic mode.
OFF (initial setting) : The temperature range limit is not active.
* When the setting, other than OFF, is made, the temperature range limit setting
on cooling, heating and automatic mode is made at the same time. However
the range cannot be limited when the set temperature range has not changed.
• To increase or decrease the temperature, press the [ TEMP ( ) or ( )] button.
• To switch the upper limit setting and the lower limit setting, press the [
]
button. The selected setting will flash and the temperature can be set.
• Settable range
Cooling/Dry mode : Lower limit: 19 ~ 30 Upper limit: 30 ~ 19 Heating mode :
Lower limit: 17 ~ 28 Upper limit: 28 ~ 17 Automatic mode : Lower limit: 19 ~ 28 Upper limit: 28 ~ 19 99
(4) Contact number setting for error situation
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
CALL OFF : The set contact numbers are not displayed in case of error.
CALL **** *** **** : The set contact numbers are displayed in case
of error.
CALL_
: The contact number can be set when the display is as
shown on the left.
• Setting the contact numbers
To set the contact numbers, follow the following procedures.
Move the flashing cursor to set numbers. Press the [ TEMP. ( ) and
( )] button to move the cursor to the right (left). Press the [ CLOCK
( ) and ( )] button to set the numbers.
[4] -4. Display change setting
(1) Temperature display / °F setting
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
: The temperature unit is used.
F: The temperature unit °F is used.
(2) Room air temperature display setting
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
ON : The room air temperature is displayed.
OFF : The room air temperature is not displayed.
(3) Automatic cooling/heating display setting
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button.
ON : One of "Automatic cooling" and "Automatic heating" is displayed
under the automatic mode is running.
OFF : Only "Automatic" is displayed under the automatic mode.
[Function selection flowchart]
Setting language (English)
Normal display
(Display when the air conditioner is not running)
Hold down the button and press the button for 2 seconds.
Hold down the button and press the button for 2 seconds.
Press the operation mode button.
Press theTIMER MENU button.
Press theTIMER ON/OFF button.
Remote controller function selection mode
Item 1
Change
Language
Item 2
English
Dot display
German
Spanish
TEMP.
Russian
Italian
MENU
BACK
MONITOR/SET
PAR-21MAA
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
FILTER
DAY
CLOCK
CHECK TEST
OPERATION
CLEAR
Chinese
French
Japanese
Item 3
OFF
no1
Operation lock setting is not used.
(Initial setting value)
Operation lock setting is except On/Off button.
Operation lock setting is all buttons.
no2
ON
Function
selection
OFF
The automatic mode is not displayed when the operation mode
is selected.
The temperature range limit is not active. (Initial setting value)
OFF
The temperature range can be changed on cooling/dry mode.
The temperature range can be changed on heating mode.
The automatic mode is displayed when the operation
mode is selected. (Initial setting value)
The temperature range can be changed on automatic mode.
Automatic filter elevation panel up/down operation mode
Not necessary to set this mode. Refer to OPERATION MANUAL of
Optional Parts (Panel) for details on operation.
Mode
selection
Fixed air flow direction mode
Not necessary to set this mode. Refer to OPERATION MANUAL of
indoor unit for details on operation.
The remote controller will be the main controller. (Initial setting value)
OFF
The clock function cannot be used.
Weekly timer can be used. (Initial setting value)
The remote controller will be the sub controller.
The clock function can be used. (Initial setting value)
ON
Auto off timer can be used.
Simple timer can be used.
Timer mode cannot be used.
OFF
Display
mode setting
°F
OFF
OFF
100
The set contact numbers are displayed in case of error.
The temperature unit °F is used.
Room air temperature is displayed. (Initial setting value)
ON
The set contact numbers are not displayed in case of error.
(Initial setting value)
The temperature unit °C is used. (Initial setting value)
ON
CALL-
°C
Room air temperature is not displayed.
One of “Automatic cooling” and “Automatic heating” is displayed
under the automatic mode is running. (Initial setting value)
Only “Automatic” is displayed under the automatic mode.
12
MONITORING THE OPERATION DATA BY THE REMOTE CONTROLLER
12-1. HOW TO "MONITOR THE OPERATION DATA"
•
Turn on the [Monitoring the operation data]
Example) Request code "004"
Discharge temperature 69
Refrigerant address "00"
(7)
(3)
(5)
(1)
(2) (6)
(4)
(1) Press the
TEST
A: Maintenance mode
B: Refrigerant address
C: Data display area
D: Request code display area
button for 3 seconds so that [ Maintenance mode] appears on the screen (at ).
(2) Press the CHECK button for 3 seconds to switch to [Maintenance monitor].
Note) It is not possible to switch to [Maintenance monitor] during data request in maintenance mode (i.e., while " - - - -" is blinking)
since no buttons are operative.
Operating the service inspection monitor
[ - - - ] appears on the screen (at ) when [Maintenance monitor] is activated.
(The display (at ) now allows you to set a request code No.)
and
) to select the desired refrigerant address.
(3) Press the [TEMP] buttons (
[Screen ]
(4) Press the [CLOCK] buttons (
and
) to set the desired request code No.
(5) Press the FILTER button to perform data request.
(The requested data will be displayed at in the same way as in maintenance mode.)
Data collected during operation of the remote controller will be displayed.
The collected data such as temperature data will not be updated automatically even if the data changes.
To display the updated data, carry out step (4) again.
Canceling the Monitoring the operation data
(6) While [Maintenance monitor] is displayed, press the
(7) To return to normal mode, press the
CHECK
ON/OFF button.
101
button for 3 seconds to return to maintenance mode.
12-2. REQUEST CODE LIST
Request code
* Certain indoor/outdoor combinations do not have the request code function; therefore, no request codes are displayed.
Description
Request content
(Display range)
Unit
0
Operation state
Refer to 12-2-1. Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
1
Compressor-Operating current (rms)
0 – 50
A
2
Compressor-Accumulated operating time
0 – 9999
10 hours
3
Compressor-Number of operation times
0 – 9999
100 times
4
Discharge temperature (TH4)
3 – 217
5
Outdoor unit - Liquid pipe 1 temperature (TH3)
-40 – 90
6
Outdoor unit - Liquid pipe 2 temperature
-40 – 90
7
Outdoor unit-2-phase pipe temperature (TH6)
-39 – 88
9
Outdoor unit-Outside air temperature (TH7)
-39 – 88
10
Outdoor unit-Heatsink temperature (TH8)
-40 – 200
12
Discharge superheat (SHd)
0 – 255
13
Sub-cool (SC)
0 – 130
16
Compressor-Operating frequency
0 – 255
Hz
17
Compressor-Target operating frequency
0 – 255
Hz
18
Outdoor unit-Fan output step
0 – 10
Step
0 – 9999
rpm
0 – 9999
rpm
Remarks
8
11
14
15
19
20
Outdoor unit-Fan 1 speed
(Only for air conditioners with DC fan motor)
Outdoor unit-Fan 2 speed
(Only for air conditioners with DC fan motor)
"0" is displayed if the air conditioner is a single-fan
type.
21
22
LEV (A) opening
0 – 500
Pulses
23
LEV (B) opening
0 – 500
Pulses
25
Primary current
0 – 50
A
26
DC bus voltage
180 – 370
V
29
Number of connected indoor units
0–4
30
Indoor unit-Setting temperature
17 – 30
31
Indoor unit-Intake air temperature <Measured by thermostat> 8 – 39
24
27
28
32
33
34
35
Indoor unit-Intake air temperature (Unit No. 1)
Units
8 – 39
<Heat mode-4-deg correction>
Indoor unit-Intake air temperature (Unit No. 2)
8 – 39
<Heat mode-4-deg correction>
Indoor unit-Intake air temperature (Unit No. 3)
8 – 39
<Heat mode-4-deg correction>
Indoor unit-Intake air temperature (Unit No. 4)
"0" is displayed if the target unit is not present.
8 – 39
<Heat mode-4-deg correction>
36
37
Indoor unit - Liquid pipe temperature (Unit No. 1)
-39 – 88
38
Indoor unit - Liquid pipe temperature (Unit No. 2)
-39 – 88
39
Indoor unit - Liquid pipe temperature (Unit No. 3)
-39 – 88
40
Indoor unit - Liquid pipe temperature (Unit No. 4)
-39 – 88
42
Indoor unit-Cond./Eva. pipe temperature (Unit No. 1)
-39 – 88
43
Indoor unit-Cond./Eva. pipe temperature (Unit No. 2)
-39 – 88
44
Indoor unit-Cond./Eva. pipe temperature (Unit No. 3)
-39 – 88
45
Indoor unit-Cond./Eva. pipe temperature (Unit No. 4)
-39 – 88
48
Thermostat ON operating time
0 – 999
Minutes
49
Test run elapsed time
0 – 120
Minutes
"0" is displayed if the target unit is not present.
41
"0" is displayed if the target unit is not present.
46
47
102
Not possible to activate maintenance mode during the test run.
Request code
Description
Request content
(Display range)
Unit
50
Indoor unit-Control state
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
51
Outdoor unit-Control state
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
52
Compressor-Frequency control state
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
53
Outdoor unit-Fan control state
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
54
Actuator output state
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
55
Error content (U9)
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
56
57
58
59
60
Signal transmission demand capacity
0 – 255
%
61
Contact demand capacity
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
62
External input state (silent mode, etc.)
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
Outdoor unit-Capacity setting display
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
71
Outdoor unit-Setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
73
Outdoor unit-SW1 setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
74
Outdoor unit-SW2 setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
72
75
76
Outdoor unit-SW4 setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
77
Outdoor unit-SW5 setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
78
Outdoor unit-SW6 setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
79
Outdoor unit-SW7 setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
80
Outdoor unit-SW8 setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
81
Outdoor unit-SW9 setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
82
Outdoor unit-SW10 setting information
Refer to 12-2-1.Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
M-NET adapter connection (presence/absence)
"0000": Not connected
"0001": Connected
–
89
Display of execution of replace/wash operation
"0000": Not washed
"0001": Washed
–
90
Outdoor unit-Microcomputer version information
Examples) Ver 5.01 → "0501"
Ver
83
84
85
86
87
88
Auxiliary information (displayed after
91
Outdoor unit-Microcomputer version information (sub No.) version information)
–
Examples) Ver 5.01 A000 → "A000"
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100 Outdoor unit - Error postponement history 1 (latest)
101 Outdoor unit - Error postponement history 2 (previous)
102 Outdoor unit - Error postponement history 3 (last but one)
Displays postponement code. (" - - " is
displayed if no postponement code is present)
Displays postponement code. (" - - " is
displayed if no postponement code is present)
Displays postponement code. (" - - " is
displayed if no postponement code is present)
103
Code
Code
Code
Remarks
Request code
Description
Request content
(Display range)
Unit
103 Error history 1 (latest)
Displays error history. (" - - " is displayed if no history is present.)
Code
104 Error history 2 (second to last)
Displays error history. (" - - " is displayed if no history is present.)
Code
105 Error history 3 (third to last)
Displays error history. (" - - " is displayed if no history is present.)
Code
Remarks
3 : TH3
106
Abnormal thermistor display
(TH3/TH6/TH7/TH8)
6 : TH6
7 : TH7
Sensor
8 : TH8
number
0 : No thermistor error
107 Operation mode at time of error
Displayed in the same way as request code "0".
–
108 Compressor-Operating current at time of error
0 – 50
A
109 Compressor-Accumulated operating time at time of error 0 – 9999
10 hours
110 Compressor-Number of operation times at time of error 0 – 9999
100 times
111 Discharge temperature at time of error
3 – 217
112 Outdoor unit - Liquid pipe 1 temperature (TH3) at time of error
-40 – 90
113 Outdoor unit - Liquid pipe 2 temperature at time of error -40 – 90
-39 – 88
116 Outdoor unit-Outside air temperature (TH7) at time of error -39 – 88
117 Outdoor unit-Heatsink temperature (TH8) at time of error -40 – 200
114 Outdoor unit-2-phase pipe temperature (TH6) at time of error
115
118 Discharge superheat (SHd) at time of error
0 – 255
119 Sub-cool (SC) at time of error
0 – 130
120 Compressor-Operating frequency at time of error
0 – 255
Hz
0 – 10
Step
121
Outdoor unit at time of error
• Fan output step
Outdoor unit at time of error
0 – 9999
rpm
0 – 9999
rpm
125 LEV (A) opening at time of error
0 – 500
Pulses
126 LEV (B) opening at time of error
0 – 500
Pulses
0 – 999
Minutes
132 Indoor - Liquid pipe temperature at time of error
-39 – 88
133 Indoor - Cond/Eva. pipe temperature at time of error
-39 – 88
-39 – 88
150 Indoor - Actual intake air temperature
-39 – 88
151 Indoor - Liquid pipe temperature
-39 – 88
152 Indoor - Cond/Eva. pipe temperature
-39 – 88
122
123
• Fan 1 speed (Only for air conditioners with DC fan)
Outdoor unit at time of error
• Fan 2 speed (Only for air conditioners with DC fan)
"0" is displayed if the air conditioner is a singlefan type.
124
127
128
129
130 Thermostat ON time until operation stops due to error
131
134
Indoor at time of error
• Intake air temperature <Thermostat judge temperature>
135
136
137
138
139
140
~
146
147
148
149
104
Average value of all indoor units is displayed if the air conditioner consists of 2 or more indoor units (twin, triple, quad).
Average value of all indoor units is displayed if the air conditioner consists of 2 or more indoor units (twin, triple, quad).
Request code
Description
Request content
(Display range)
Unit
Remarks
153
154
155
Indoor-Fan operating time
(After filter is reset)
Indoor-Total operating time
(Fan motor ON time)
0 – 9999
1 hour
0 – 9999
10 hours
156
0 – 255
Fan control data
–
For indoor fan phase control
"00 **" "**" indicates fan control data.
–
For indoor fan pulsation control
"00 **" "**" indicates fan control data.
–
For indoor DC brushless motor control
162 Indoor unit-Model setting information
Refer to 12-2-1 Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
163 Indoor unit-Capacity setting information
Refer to 12-2-1 Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
164 Indoor unit-SW3 information
Undefined
–
165 Wireless pair No. (indoor control board side) setting
Refer to 12-2-1 Detail Contents in Request Code.
–
166 Indoor unit-SW5 information
Undefined
–
Examples) Ver 5.01 → "0501"
Ver
157 Indoor fan output value (Sj value)
158
Indoor fan output value
(Pulsation ON/OFF)
159 Indoor fan output value (duty value)
160
161
167
~
189
190 Indoor unit-Microcomputer version information
191 Indoor unit-Microcomputer version information (sub No.) Auxiliary information (displayed after version information)
Examples) Ver 5.01 A000 → "A000"
–
192
~
764
765 Stable operation (Heat mode)
This request code is not provided to collect data. It is used to fix the operation state.
766 Stable operation (Cool mode)
This request code is not provided to collect data. It is used to fix the operation state.
767 Stable operation cancellation
This request code is not provided to collect data. It is used to cancel the operation state that has been
fixed by request codes "765" and "766".
105
12-2-1. Detail Contents in Request Code
Example) Request code "004"
Discharge temperature 69
Refrigerant address "00"
[Operation state] (Request code :" 0")
Relay output state
Data display
Display
C
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
Relay output state
Operation mode
Operation mode
Display
0
C
H
d
A: Maintenance mode display
B: Refrigerant address
C: Data display area
D: Request code display area
Operation mode
STOP • FAN
COOL • DRY
HEAT
DEFROST
Power currently
supplied to compressor
–
Compressor
Four-way valve
Solenoid valve
–
–
–
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
[Indoor unit – Control state] (Request code :" 50 ")
Data display
Unit No. 4 state
Unit No. 3 state
Unit No. 2 state
Unit No. 1 state
Display
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F
State
Normal
Preparing for heat operation
–
–
Heater is ON.
Anti-freeze protection is ON.
Overheat protection is ON.
Requesting compressor to turn OFF
There are no corresponding units.
[Outdoor unit – Control state] (Request code :" 51")
0
0
0
Data display
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
State
Normal
Preparing for heat operation
Defrost
[Compressor – Frequency control state] (Request code :" 52")
Frequency control state Data display
0
Display
0
Frequency control state Frequency control state Frequency control state Display
0
1
2
Current limit control
No current limit
Primary current limit control is ON.
Secondary current limit control is ON.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
d
E
F
Discharge temperature Condensation temperature
Anti-freeze
Heatsink temperature
overheat prevention
overheat prevention
protection control overheat prevention
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
106
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
Controlled
[Fan control state] (Request code :" 53 ")
Data display
0
0
Fan step correction value by heatsink temperature overheat prevention control
Fan step correction value by cool condensation temperature overheat prevention control
Display
- (minus)
0
1
2
Correction value
–1
0
+1
+2
[Actuator output state] (Request code :"54")
Data display
0
0
Actuator output state Actuator output state Actuator output state Display
SV1
0
1
ON
2
3
ON
4
5
ON
6
7
ON
8
9
ON
A
b
ON
C
d
E
F
Actuator output state Four-way valve
Compressor
Compressor is
warming up
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
52C
0
1
ON
2
3
4
5
6
7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SV2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
[Error content (U9)] (Request code :"55 ")
Data display
0
0
Error content Error content Error content Display
Overvoltage
error
: Detected
Undervoltage
error
L1-phase
open error
Power synchronizing
signal error
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
d
E
F
Error content Display
0
1
2
3
107
Converter Fo
error
SS
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Display
: Detected
PAM error
ON
ON
ON
ON
[Contact demand capacity] (Request code : " 61")
Data display
0
0
Setting content
0
Setting content
Display
Setting value
0
1
2
3
0%
50%
75%
100%
[External input state] (Request code : "62")
Data display
0
0
Input state
0
Input state
Display
Contact demand
input
Silent mode
input
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
C
d
E
F
[Outdoor unit -–Capacity setting display] (Request code : "70")
Data display
9
10
11
14
20
25
28
40
50
Capacity
35
50
60
71
100
125
140
200
250
[Outdoor unit – Setting information] (Request code : "71")
Data display
0
0
Setting information Setting information Setting information Display
Defrost mode
0
Standard
1
For high humidity
Setting information Single-/
Display
3-phase
0
Single-phase
1
2
3-phase
3
108
Heat pump/
cooling only
Heat pump
Cooling only
Heat pump
Cooling only
Spare 1
input
: Input present
Spare 2
input
[Outdoor unit switch setting display (SW1 to SW10, except SW3)] Request codes: 73 to 82
0: Swich OFF
1: Swich ON
SW1, SW2, SW6, SW7
Data display
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0b
0C
0d
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
0: Swich OFF
SW5
1
2
3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1: Swich ON
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0: Swich OFF
SW8
1
2
3
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Data display
4
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0b
0C
0d
0E
0F
1: Swich ON
Data display
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
0: Swich OFF
1: Swich ON
SW4, SW9, SW10
Data display
1
2
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
109
00
00
00
00
00
01
02
03
[Indoor unit – Model setting information] (Request code : "162" )
Data display
0
Display
0
See the table on the right.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0b
0C
0d
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1b
1C
1d
1E
1F
Model setting state
PSA-RP•GA, PSH-PGAH
PEAD-RP•EA(2)/GA, PEHD-P•EAH
SEZ-KA•VA
SLZ-KA•VA(L)
PCA-RP•HA
PEA-RP400/500GA
PEA-RP200/250GA
PEA-RP•EA
MEXZ-GA•VA(L)
Display
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2b
2C
2d
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3b
3C
3d
3E
3F
Model setting state
PKA-RP•FAL(2), PKH-P•FALH
PCA-RP·GA(2), PCH-P•GAH, PLA-RP·BA, PLA-RP71-100BA2
PCA-RP•KA
PKA-RP•GAL, PKH-P•GALH
PLA-RP• AA
PLH-P•AAH
PKA-RP•HAL/KAL
PEAD-RP•JA(L)
PLA-RP•AA2
PLA-RP100BA3, 140BA2
[Indoor unit – Capacity setting information] (Request code : "163")
Data display
0
0
See the table on the right.
Display
Capacity setting state
Display
Capacity setting state
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0b
0C
0d
0E
0F
12
16
22
25
28
32
35, 36
40
45
50
56
63
71
80
90
100
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1b
1C
1d
1E
1F
112
125
140
160
200
224
250
280
[Wireless pair No. (indoor control board side) setting] (Request code :" 165")
Data display
0
Display
0
See the table on the right.
00
01
02
03
Pair No. setting state
No.
No.
No.
No.
0
1 J41 disconnected
2 J42 disconnected
3 J41, J42 disconnected
110
13
EASY MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
● Reduces maintenance work drastically.
● Enables you to check operation data of the indoor and outdoor units by remote controller.
Furthermore, use of maintenance stable-operation control that fixes the operating frequency, allows smooth inspection, even for
inverter models.
Smooth Maintenance Function
Discharge temperature 64
● Conventional inspection work
●Outdoor unit ●
●Indoor unit ●
Measure
the intake air
temperature.
Remove the
service panel.
Easy maintenance information (unit)
Compressor
Accumulated operating
time (%10 hours)
Number of ON/OFF
times (%10 times)
Operating
current (A)
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
temperature ()
Discharge
temperature ()
Outside air
temperature ()
Measure the discharge
temperature.
Intake air
temperature ()
Heat exchanger
temperature ()
Filter operating
time* (Hours)
Measure the outside air
temperature
* The filter operating time is the time that has elapsed since the filter was reset.
13-1. MAINTENANCE MODE OPERATION METHOD
*
If you are going to use 13-2. "GUIDE FOR OPERATION CONDITION", set the airflow to "High" before activating maintenance mode.
● Switching to maintenance mode
Maintenance mode can be activated either when the air conditioner is operated or stopped.
It cannot be activated during test run.
+ Maintenance information can be viewed even if the air conditioner is stopped.
■ Remote controller button information
Operation mode
Compressor information Outdoor unit information Indoor unit information
Confirm
Activate/cancel maintenance mode
(1) Press the TEST button for 3 seconds to switch to maintenance mode.
[Display ] MAINTENANCE
If stable operation is unnecessary or if you want to check the data with the air conditioner stopped, skip to step (4).
● Fixed Hz operation
The operating frequency can be fixed to stabilize operation of inverter model.
If the air conditioner is currently stopped, start it by this operation.
(2) Press the
[Display ]
MODE button to select the desired operation mode.
Stable cooling
operation
Stable heating
operation
Stable operation
cancellation
COOL
STABLE MODE
HEAT
STABLE MODE
STABLE MODE
CANCEL
(3) Press the FILTER ( ) button to confirm the setting.
[Display ] Waiting for stabilization
Stabilized
After 10 to 20 minutes
111
● Data measurement
When the operation is stabilized, measure operation data as explained below.
(4) Press the [TEMP] buttons (
and
) to select the desired refrigerant address.
[Screen ]
(5) Select the type of data to be displayed.
After selecting, go to step (6).
Compressor information
MENU button
[Display ]
Cumulative
operation time
ON/OFF Number
COMP ON
x10 HOURS
COMP ON
x100 TIMES
Operating current
COMP ON
CURRENT (A)
Outdoor unit information
ON/OFF button
exchanger
Heat
temperature
[Display ]
OUTDOOR UNIT
H·EXC. TEMP
Comp discharge
temperature
OUTDOOR UNIT
OUTLET TEMP
Outdoor ambient
temperature
OUTDOOR UNIT
OUTDOOR TEMP
Indoor unit information
button
[Display ]
Indoor room
temperature
Heat exchanger
Filter operating
temperature
INDOOR UNIT
INLET TEMP
time
INDOOR UNIT
H·EXC. TEMP
INDOOR UNIT
FILTER USE H
(6) Press the FILTER ( ) button to confirm the setting.
[Display example for accumulated operating time]
Blinking
Display Waiting for response
After approx.
10 seconds
12,340 hours
(7) Data is displayed on the display (at ).
To check the data for each item, repeat steps (5) to (7).
(8) To cancel maintenance mode, press the
TEST
button for 3 seconds or press the
ON/OFF button.
■ Refrigerant address
Single refrigerant system
Multi refrigerant system (group control)
In the case of single refrigerant system, the refrigerant address
is "00" and no operation is required.
Simultaneous twin, triple units belong to this category
(single refrigerant system).
Up to 16 refrigerant systems (16 outdoor units) can be connected as a group by 1 remote controller. To check or set the
refrigerant addresses.
[1:1]
Refrigerant
address=00
[Twin]
Refrigerant
address=00
Outdoor
unit
Outdoor
unit
Indoor unit
01
Indoor unit
01
Remote
controller
Remote
controller
Refrigerant
address
00
Outdoor
unit
Refrigerant
address
01
Outdoor
unit
Refrigerant
address
02
Outdoor
unit
Refrigerant
address
15
Outdoor
unit
Indoor unit
01
Indoor unit
01
Indoor unit
01
Indoor unit
01
Indoor unit
02
Remote
controller
112
13-2. GUIDE FOR OPERATION CONDITION
Terminal block
Check Points
Result
Breaker
Good
Retightened
Outdoor Unit
Good
Retightened
Indoor Unit
Good
Retightened
(Insulation resistance)
M
(Voltage)
Time
Number of ON/OFF times
Times
A
Classification
Item
Refrigerant/heat exchanger temperature
COOL
HEAT
Refrigerant/discharge temperature
COOL
HEAT
Inspection
Is "D000" displayed stably on the remote
Air/outside air temperature
COOL
HEAT
(Air/discharge temperature)
COOL
HEAT
Appearance
Good
Cleaning required
Heat exchanger
Good
Cleaning required
Sound/vibration
None
Air/intake air temperature
COOL
HEAT
Refrigerant/heat exchanger temperature COOL
HEAT
Filter operating time*
difference
Good
Cleaning required
Filter
Good
Cleaning required
Fan
Good
Cleaning required
Heat exchanger
Good
Cleaning required
Sound/vibration
None
Present
Is "D000" displayed stably on the remote
controller?
difference
* Fixed Hz operation may not be possible under the following temperature ranges.
A)In cool mode, outdoor intake air temperature is 40 or higher or
indoor intake air temperature is 23 or lower.
B)In heat mode, outdoor intake air temperature is 20 or higher or
indoor intake air temperature is 25 or lower.
* If the air conditioner is operated at a temperature range other than the
ones above but operation is not stabilized after 30 minutes or more have
elapsed, carry out inspection.
* In heat mode, the operation state may vary due to frost forming on the
outdoor heat exchanger.
Filter may be clogged. *1
Inspection A
Performance has dropped. Detailed in-
Heat
spection is necessary.
Inspection B
Refrigerant amount is dropping.
Inspection C
Filter or indoor heat exchanger may be
Heat mode
45
40
Inspection C
35
30
25
Filter inspection
20
Normal
15
10
Inspection B
Inspection A
5
0 10
20 30 40 50 60 70 80
[ Discharge temperature] – [ Outdoor
heat exchanger temperature)
clogged.
*
( Indoor intake air temperature)— (Indoor
heat exchanger temperature)
Normal operation state
Filter inspection
( Indoor intake air temperature)
Result
Normal
heat exchanger temperature)
( Indoor heat exchanger temperature) –
Judgment
Cool
Stable Unstable
Temperature ( Discharge temperature) – ( Indoor
Cool mode
Check item
Indoor heat exchanger temperature)
* The filter operating time is the time that has elapsed since the filter was reset.
Area
heat exchanger temperature)
( Indoor intake air temperature) – (
Time
Decorative panel
Stable Unstable
Temperature ( Discharge temperature) – ( Outdoor
Inspection
HEAT
(Air/discharge temperature)
controller?
Present
COOL
Result
The above judgement is just guide based on Japanese standard
conditions.
It may be changed depending on the indoor and outdoor
temperature.
*1 It may be judged as "Filter inspection" due to the outdoor and
indoor temperature, even though it is not clogged.
113
( Indoor heat exchanger temperature) —
( Indoor intake air temperature)
Current
Cool
CleanliTemperature
ness
Temperature
Cleanliness
Outdoor Unit
pressor
Indoor Unit
V
Accumulated operating time
Com-
Enter the temperature differences between , , and into
the graph given below.
Operation state is determined according to the plotted areas on
the graph.
For data measurements, set the fan speed to "Hi" before activating maintenance mode.
Heat
Power supply
Loose connection
Inspection item
45
40
Inspection C
Filter inspection
35
30
25
Normal
20
15
10
Inspection B
Inspection A
5
0 10
20 30 40 50 60 70 80
[ Discharge temperature] – [ Indoor
heat exchanger temperature)
13-3. INITIAL SETTINGS FOR REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION
(except RP200/250)
■ Remote controller button position
This air conditioner (Outdoor unit) can detect refrigerant leakage
which may happen during a long period of use. In order to enable
the leakage detection, the following settings are required to let the
unit memorize the initial condition (initial refregerant amount).
Operation mode
Compressor information Outdoor unit information Indoor unit information
Confirm
Caution :
Make sure to perform the "test run" and confirm the unit works
without any problems, before starting the following setting.
For more precise detection, make sure to set the airflow at
"High notch" before enabling this setting.
[Display ]
1.How to select the "Refrigerant Leakage Detection" mode
Refrigerant leakage
detection
(initial teaching)
GAS LEAK
TEST START
Refrigerant leakage
detection judgement
GAS LEAK
JUDGE
Detection is possible regardless the unit`s operation (ON or OFF).
Press TEST button for more than 3 seconds to switch to
"EASY MAINTENANCE" mode.[Display ]
2.How to start the initial learning
Press . CLOCK
button and select the [GAS LEAK TEST START]
* The initial learning for the leakage detection is always done once after
the new installation or the data reset.
[Display ] Waiting for stabilization
Stabilized
After 45 minutes
Press
FILTER
( )button to confirm.
How to finish the initial learning
Once the unit`s operation is stabilized, the initial learning is completed.
Press TEST button for more than 3 seconds to cancel the initial leaning.
The initial learning can also be cancelled by pressing ON/OFF button.
114
3. How to start "Judgment of refrigerant leakage " mode.
To know the current condition of refrigerant amount, same operation must be performed.
Please repeat the same procedure ~ as when "Initial learning operation" for "Checking operation".
Press . CLOCK
button and select the [GAS LEAK JUDGE]
Refrigerant leakage
detection
(initial teaching)
Refrigerant leakage
detection judgment
GAS LEAK
TEST START
Press
FILTER
GAS LEAK
JUDGE
( ) button to confirm. (Display LOADING)
Display Waiting for response
Display[C] indication
"0"
" 20 "
" 8888 "
"
Flashing
Loading
0"
Judgment
Meaning (% setting : 80%, RP60-RP140)
Refrigerant leakage is less than 20% of initial condition.
Refrigerant leakage is more than 20% of initial condition.
"Error" = No initial data is available.
<Note>
% for judgment can be changed by "Unit function setting of remote controller".
RP35-RP50 : Selectable either 70% (initial setting) or 50%
RP60-RP140 : Selectable either 80% (initial setting) or 60%
Refer to 11-1 Mode No.21.
(When the "%" for judgment is changed, please start "Initial learning ~" about 1 minute () and cancel .)
Then, please start "Judgment of refrigerant leakage" mode (
~).
<How to reset the initial condition (data) >
When the unit is removed and installed again or refrigerant is changed additionally, the "Initial learning" must be
performed again by following procedure.
(1)Turn "Main Power" OFF.
(2)Connect the pin of CN31 to ON position on the outdoor controller board.
(3)Turn SW4-1 on the outdoor controller board to ON.
(4)Turn "Main Power" ON to reset the initial data.
After reset the data, please turn the pin of CN31 and SW4-1 to original (OFF) position.
<Caution>
1.On the following condition, the operation cannot be stabillized and judgment of cheking operation may not be accurate.
(a)Outdoor temperature 40°C or Room temperature 23°C
(b)Airflow setting is not "High-notch".
2.Please check the operation and unit status, when the operation is not stabilized after more than 45 minutes.
115
14
DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
PUHZ-RP35VHA4 PUHZ-RP50VHA4
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
Photo 1
1. Removing the top panel, service panel, front panel and
back panel
(1) Remove the top panel fixing screws (4 × 10), one from
the right and two from the eft side, and detach the top
panel.
Top panel
Top panel
fixing screws
Back panel
(2) Remove 1 service panel fixing screw (4 × 10) and detach
the service panel by pulling it downward. (See Photo 2.)
Service panel
for charge
plug
Grille
(3) Remove the front panel fixing screws (4 × 10), 5 from the
front, 2 from the right and 2 from the left side, and detach
the front panel.
(4) Remove the back panel fixing screws (4 × 10), 4 from the
right and 3 from the rear side, and detach the back panel.
Front panel
Service panel
Photo 2
Service panel
fixing screw
Pull down
4 hooks
2. Removing the fan motor
(1) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 1 nut (M6, left-screw) and detach the propeller.
(4) Disconnect the connector CNF1 on the controller circuit
board in the electrical parts box.
(5) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire in the motor support.
(6) Remove 4 fan motor fixing screws (4 × 18) and detach the
fan motor. (See Photo 3.)
Photo 3
Propeller
Electrical parts box
Nut
Photo 4
Fan motor fixing screws
Clamp
Fan
motor
(MF1)
Motor support
Fan motor fixing screws
116
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
3. Removing the electrical parts box
Photo 5
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Disconnect the indoor/outdoor connecting wire from
terminal block.
(5) Remove all the following connectors from controller circuit board;
fan motor, LEV, thermistor<Outdoor pipe>,
thermistor<Discharge>, thermistor<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>,
thermistor<Outdoor>, high pressure switch, 4-way valve
and bypass valve.
Pull out the disconnected wire from the electrical parts box.
<Diagram symbol in the connector housing>
• Fan motor (CNF1)
• LEV (LEV-A and LEV-B)
• Thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3) (TH33)
• Thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
• Thermistor <Discharge> (TH4)
• Thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe, Outdoor> (TH6/7)
• High pressure switch (63H)
(6) Remove the terminal cover and disconnect the compressor
lead wire.
(7) Remove the electrical parts box fixing screws, 1 from the
front, the right and the rear side, and detach the electrical
parts box by pulling it upward.
4. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
and thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3) (TH33)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove the back panel fixing screws, 4 from the right and
3 from the rear side, and detach the back panel.
(See Photo 1.)
(5) Disconnect the connector TH3 (white) or TH6/7 (red) or
TH33 (yellow) on the controller circuit board in the
electrical parts box.
(6) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire in the rear of the
electrical parts box.
(7) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3), (TH33) and
thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6) from the
sensor holder.
Electrical parts box
Controller circuit
board (C.B.)
Terminal
block
(TB1)
Electrical
parts box
fixing
screw
Terminal
cover
Compressor (MC)
Photo 6
Electrical
parts box
Thermistor
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>
(TH6)
Clamp
Note: Replace the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
and the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7) together since
they are combined.
Refer to No. 5. to remove the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7).
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
(TH33)
117
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
(TH3)
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
5. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Figure 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Figure 1.)
(3) Disconnect the connector TH7 (red) on the controller circuit
board in the electrical parts box.
(4) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire in the rear of the
electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7) from the sensor
holder.
Photo 7
Thermistor <Outdoor>
(TH7)
Electrical parts box
Note: In case of replacing thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7),
replace it together with thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase
pipe> (TH6), since they are combined together.
Refer to No.4. to remove thermistor
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>.
Sensor holder
6. Removing the thermistor <Discharge> (TH4) and thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove the back panel. (See Photo 1.)
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
Photo 8
Thermistor <Discharge>
(TH4)
[Thermistor <Discharge> (TH4)]
(6) Pull out the thermistor <Discharge> (TH4) from the sensor
holder. (See Photo 8.)
[Thermistor <Shell> (TH32)]
(6) Pull out the thermistor <Shell> (TH32) from the sensor
holder. (See Photo 8.)
Thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
7. Removing the 4-way valve (21S4) and LEV coil (LEV (A),
LEV (B))
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove the back panel. (See Photo 1.)
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
Photo 9
LEV coil (LEV A)
LEV coil (LEV B)
4-way valve (21S4)
[Removing the 4-way valve (21S4)]
(6) Remove 1 4-way valve fixing screw (M4 × 6).
(7) Remove the 4-way valve by sliding the coil to the right.
[Removing the LEV coil (LEV (A), LEV (B)) ]
(6) Remove the LEV coil by sliding the coil upward.
4-way valve
LEV
118
4-way valve fixing screw
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
8. Removing the 4-way valve
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove the back panel. (See Photo 1.)
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
(6) Remove the 4-way valve (See Photo 8.)
(7) Recover refrigerant.
(8) Remove the welded part of 4-way valve.
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the 4-way valve, cover it with
a wet cloth to prevent it from heating (120°C or
more), then braze the pipes so that the inside of
pipes are not oxidized.
Photo 10
LEV coil (LEV A)
LEV coil (LEV B)
4-way valve (21S4)
9. Removing LEV
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove the back panel. (See Photo 1.)
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
(6) Remove the LEV coil. (See Photo 8.)
(7) Recover refrigerant.
(8) Remove the welded part of LEV.
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by removing the back panel.
Note 3: When installing the LEV, cover it with a wet cloth
to prevent it from heating (120°C or more), then
braze the pipes so that the inside of pipes are not
oxidized.
10. Removing the high pressure switch (63H)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove the back panel. (See Photo 1.)
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
(6) Pull out the lead wire of high pressure switch.
(7) Recover refrigerant.
(8) Remove the welded part of high pressure switch.
4-way valve
LEV
4-way valve fixing screw
Photo 11
High pressure
switch (63H)
Charge plug
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by
removing the back panel.
Note 3: When installing the high pressure switch, cover it
with a wet cloth to prevent it from heating (100°C
or more), then braze the pipes so that the inside
of pipes are not oxidized.
11. Removing the reactor (ACL)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove the back panel. (See Photo 1.)
(5) Remove 3 reactor fixing screws (4 × 20) and remove the
reactor.
w The reactor is attached to the rear of the electrical parts box.
Photo 12
Reactor fixing screw
Reactor
(ACL)
Electrical
parts box
Reactor fixing screws
119
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
12. Removing the compressor (MC)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove the back panel. (See Photo 1.)
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
(6) Remove the thermistor <Discharge> (TH4) and thermistor
<Shell> (TH32). (See Photo 8.)
(7) Remove 3 separator fixing screws (4 × 10) and remove
the separator.
(8) Recover refrigerant.
(9) Remove 3 compressor fixing nuts by using a spanner or a
adjustable wrench.
(10) Remove the welded pipe of motor for compressor inlet
and outlet.
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Photo 13
Compressor
(MC)
Power
receiver
Separator
Valve bed
Separator
fixing screw
Compressor
fixing nut
13. Removing the power receiver
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 2.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the front panel. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove the back panel. (See Photo 1.)
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
(6) Recover refrigerant.
(7) Remove 4 welded pipes of power receiver inlet and outlet.
(8) Remove 2 receiver leg fixing screws (4 × 10).
(9) Remove the power receiver together with the receiver leg.
Photo 14
Outlet
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Inlet
Power
receiver
Receiver leg
fixing screw
120
Receiver leg
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PHOTOS & ILLUSTRATION
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. Removing the service panel and top panel
(1) Remove 3 service panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and slide
the hook on the right downward to remove the service
panel.
(2) Remove screws (3 for front, 3 for rear/5 × 10) of the top
panel and remove it.
Photo 1
Top panel fixing screws
Top panel
Slide
Service panel
Fan grille
Grille fixing screws
2. Removing the fan motor (MF1)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 5 fan grille fixing screws (5 × 10) to detach the
fan grille. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove a nut (for right handed screw of M6) to detach
the propeller. (See Photo 2.)
(5) Disconnect the connector CNF1 on controller circuit
board in electrical parts box.
(6) Remove 4 fan motor fixing screws (5 × 25) to detach the
fan motor. (See Photo 3.)
Photo 2
Front panel
Propeller
Photo 3
Fan motor fixing screws
121
Fan
motor
(MF1)
Nut
Front panel fixing screws
3. Removing the electrical parts box
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the indoor/outdoor connecting wire from
terminal block.
(4) Remove all the following connectors from controller circuit board;
fan motor, LEV, thermistor<Outdoor pipe>, thermistor<Shell>,
thermistor<Discharge>, thermistor<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>,
thermistor<Outdoor>, thermistor<Heatsink>,
high pressure switch, 4-way valve and bypass valve.
Then remove a screw (4 × 8) from the valve bed to
remove the lead wire.
Pull out the disconnected wire from the electrical parts box.
<Diagram symbol in the connector housing>
• Fan motor (CNF1)
• LEV (LEV-A and LEV-B)
• Thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3) (TH33)
• Thermistor <Discharge> (TH4)
• Thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe, Outdoor> (TH7/6)
• Thermistor <Heatsink> (CN3)
• High pressure switch (63H)
• 4-way valve coil (21S4)
• Bypass valve coil (SV2)
• Thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
(5) Remove the terminal cover and disconnect the compressor
lead wire.
(6) Remove an electrical parts box fixing screw (4 × 10) and
detach the electrical parts box by pulling it upward.
The electrical parts box is fixed with 2 hooks on the left
and 1 hook on the right.
Service panel
fixing screws
Fan motor
fixing screws
Photo 4
Electrical parts box
Electrical parts
box fixing screw
Terminal block
(TB1)
Controller circuit
board (C.B.)
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
4. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the connector TH7/6 (red) on the
controller circuit board in the electrical parts box.
(4) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire in the rear of the
electrical parts box.
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
from the sensor holder.
Photo 5
Controller
circuit board
(C.B.)
Electrical parts box
Thermistor
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>
(TH6)
Note: In case of replacing thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase
pipe> (TH6), replace it together with thermistor
<Outdoor> (TH7), since they are combined together.
Refer to No.5 below to remove thermistor <Outdoor>.
5. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the connector TH7/6 (red) on the controller
circuit board in the electrical parts box.
(4) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire in the rear of the
electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7) from the sensor
holder.
Clamp
Photo 6
Note: In case of replacing thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7),
replace it together with thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase
pipe> (TH6), since they are combined together.
Refer to No.4 above to remove thermistor
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>.
6. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3) (TH33) and
thermistor <Discharge> (TH4), thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Disconnect the connectors, TH3 (white) and TH4 (white),
TH33 (yellow), TH32 (black) on the controller circuit board
in the electrical parts box.
(3) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire in the rear of the
electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
(4) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3), (TH33) and
thermistor <Discharge> (TH4) from the sensor holder.
[Removing the thermistor<Shell> (TH32)]
(5) Remove the compressor cover (upper) and pull out the
thermistor <Shell> (TH32) from the holder of the compressor shell. (TH3, TH33 : See Figure 1.)
122
Lead wire of thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7)
Sensor holder
Photo 7
Compressor
cover (upper)
Dischage
thermistor
(TH4)
PHOTOS
OPERATING PROCEDURE
7. Removing the 4-way valve coil (21S4), LEV coil (LEV(A),
LEV(B))
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
[Removing the 4-way valve coil]
(4) Remove 4-way valve coil fixing screw (M4 × 6).
(5) Remove the 4-way valve coil by sliding the coil toward you.
(6) Disconnect the connector 21S4 (green) on the controller
board in the electrical parts box.
[Removing the LEV coil]
(4) Remove the LEV coil by sliding the coil upward.
(5) Disconnect the connectors, LEV A (white) and LEV B (red),
on the controller circuit board in the electrical parts box.
Photo 8
4-way valve coil
fixing screw
4-way valve
High pressure
switch (63H)
Figure 1
8. Removing the 4-way valve
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) and then remove the
valve bed.
(5) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the rear
of the unit and then remove the right side panel.
(6) Remove the 4-way valve coil. (See Photo 8.)
(7) Recover refrigerant.
(8) Remove the welded part of 4-way valve.
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the 4-way valve, cover it with a wet
cloth to prevent it from heating (120°C or more),
then braze the pipes so that the inside of pipes
are not oxidized.
9. Removing the LEV
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) and then remove the
valve bed.
(5) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the rear
of the unit and then remove the right side panel.
(6) Remove the LEV.
(7) Recover refrigerant.
(8) Remove the welded part of linear expansion valve.
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the LEV, cover it with a wet cloth
to prevent it from heating (120°C or more), then
braze the pipes so that the inside of pipes are not
oxidized.
123
LEV coil
(LEV A)
LEV
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
(TH33)
4-way valve
coil (21S4)
High pressure
switch (63H)
LEV coil
(LEV B)
Thermistor
<Discharge>
(TH4)
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
(TH3)
4-way
valve
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
10. Removing the high pressure switch (63H)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit and remove the right side panel.
(5) Pull out the lead wire of high pressure switch.
(6) Recover refrigerant.
(7) Remove the welded part of high pressure switch.
Photo 8
Lead wire of
high pressure switch
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by
removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the high pressure switch, cover it
with a wet cloth to prevent it from heating (100°C
or more), then braze the pipes so that the inside
of pipes are not oxidized.
High pressure switch (63H)
11. Removing the reactor (ACL)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 3 reactor fixing screws (4 × 16) and remove the
reactor.
w The reactor is attached to the rear of the electrical parts box.
Photo 9
Reactor fixing screw
Reactor
(ACL)
Reactor fixing screws
124
Electrical parts box
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
12. Removing the compressor (MC)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 2 front cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the front cover panel. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 2 back cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the back cover panel.
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(6) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) and then remove the
valve bed.
(7) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
(8) Remove 3 separator fixing screws (4 × 10) and remove
the separator.
(9) Recover refrigerant.
(10) Remove the 3 points of the compressor fixing
nut using a spanner or a adjustable wrench.
(11) Remove the welded pipe of compressor inlet
and outlet then remove the compressor.
Photo 10
Valve bed
Valve bed
fixing screws
Power
receiver
Valve bed
fixing screw
Separator
Compressor
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Compressor fixing
nut
Separator fixing screw
13. Removing the power receiver
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 2 front cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the front cover panel. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 2 back cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the back cover panel.
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(6) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) then remove the
valve bed.
(7) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
(8) Recover refrigerant.
(9) Remove 4 welded pipes of power receiver inlet and outlet.
(10) Remove 2 receiver leg fixing screws (4 × 10).
Photo 11
Inlet
Outlet
Power
receiver
Receiver
leg
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Receiver leg
fixing screws
125
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PHOTOS & ILLUSTRATION
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Photo 1
1. Removing the service panel and top panel
(1) Remove 3 service panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and slide
the hook on the right downward to remove the service
panel.
(2) Remove screws (3 for front, 3 for rear/5 × 10) of the top
panel and remove it.
Top panel
Top panel fixing screws
Service panel
Grille
fixing
screws
Slide
Grille
fixing
screws
Service panel
fixing screws
Cover panel
fixing screws
Photo 2
2. Removing the fan motor (MF1, MF2)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 4 fan grille fixing screws (5 × 10) to detach the
fan grille. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove a nut (for right handed screw of M6) to detach
the propeller. (See Photo 2.)
(5) Disconnect the connectors, CNF1, CNF2 on controller
circuit board in electrical parts box.
(6) Remove 4 fan motor fixing screws (5 × 20) to detach the
fan motor. (See Photo 3.)
Photo 3
Front panel
Fan motor
fixing screws
Fan motor
Propeller
Nut
Fan motor
fixing screws
3. Removing the electrical parts box
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the indoor/outdoor connecting wire from
terminal block.
(4) Remove all the following connectors from controller circuit board;
fan motor, LEV, thermistor <Outdoor pipe>,
thermistor <Discharge>, thermistor <Shell>, thermistor
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>, thermistor <Outdoor>, high pressure switch and 4-way valve coil.
Pull out the disconnected wire from the electrical parts box.
<Diagram symbol in the connector housing>
• Fan motor (CNF1, CNF2)
• LEV (LEV-A and LEV-B) (LEV-C (only for RP140))
• Thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3) (TH33)
• Thermistor <Discharge> (TH4)
• Thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe, Outdoor> (TH7/6)
• High pressure switch (63H)
• 4-way valve coil (21S4)
• Thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
(5) Remove the terminal cover and disconnect the
compressor lead wire.
(6) Remove 2 electrical parts box fixing screws (4 × 10) and
detach the electrical parts box by pulling it upward. The
electrical parts box is fixed with 2 hooks on the left and 1
hook on the right.
126
Photo 4
Electrical
parts box
Electrical parts
box fixing screw
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
4. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the connector TH7/6 (red) on the
controller circuit board in the electrical parts box.
(4) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire in the rear of the
electrical parts box.
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
from the sensor holder.
Photo 5
Controller
circuit board (C.B.)
Thermistor <Outdoor
2-phase pipe>(TH6)
Note: In case of replacing thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase
pipe> (TH6), replace it together with thermistor
<Outdoor> (TH7) since they are combined together.
Refer to No.5 below to remove thermistor <Outdoor>.
Clamp
Electrical parts box
5. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the connector TH7/6 (red) on the controller
circuit board in the electrical parts box.
(4) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire in the rear of the
electrical parts box. (See Photo 5.)
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7) from the sensor
holder.
Note: In case of replacing thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7),
replace it together with thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase
pipe> (TH6), since they are combined together.
Refer to No.4 above to remove thermistor
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>.
6. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3) (TH33) and
thermistor <Discharge> (TH4), thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Disconnect the connectors, TH3 (white) and TH4 (white),
TH33 (yellow), TH32 (black) on the controller circuit board
in the electrical parts box.
(3) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire under the electrical parts
box.
(4) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3), (TH33) and
thermistor <Discharge> (TH4) from the sensor holder.
[Removing the thermistor<Shell> (TH32)]
(5) Remove the sound proof cover (upper) for compressor.
(6) Pull out the thermistor <Shell> (TH32) from the holder of
the compressor shell. (TH33: See Photo 9 or Figure 1)
Photo 8
Sound proof cover
Photo 6
Lead wire of thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7)
Sensor holder
Photo 7
Thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3)
Thermistor
<Shell> (TH32)
Thermistor
<Discharge>
(TH4)
Compressor
127
PHOTOS
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Figure 1 (PUHZ-RP100-125VKA)
7. Removing the 4-way valve coil (21S4), and LEV coil
(LEV (A), LEV (B)), (LEV (C) :only for RP140)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
4-way valve
coil (21S4)
4-way valve
[Removing the 4-way valve coil]
(3) Remove 4-way valve coil fixing screw (M4 × 6).
(4) Remove the 4-way valve coil by sliding the coil toward you.
(5) Disconnect the connector 21S4 (green) on the controller
circuit board in the electrical parts box.
[Removing the LEV coil]
(3) Remove the LEV coil by sliding the coil upward.
(4) Disconnect the connectors, LEV A (white) and LEV B (red),
LEV C (blue) on the controller circuit board in the electrical
parts box.
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
(TH33)
LEV coil
(LEV B)
8. Removing the 4-way valve
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) then remove the
valve bed.
(5) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
(6) Remove the 4-way valve coil.
(7) Recover refrigerant.
(8) Remove the welded part of 4-way valve.
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the 4-way valve, cover it with
a wet cloth to prevent it from heating (120°C or
more), then braze the pipes so that the inside of
pipes are not oxidized.
LEV coil
(LEV A)
Ball valve
Valve bed
Stop valve
(PUHZ-RP140VKA)
LEV coil
(LEV C)
9. Removing LEV
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
4-way valve
(3) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
coil (21S4)
(4) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) then remove the
valve bed.
4-way valve
(5) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
(6) Remove the LEV coil.
(7) Recover refrigerant.
(8) Remove the welded part of LEV.
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the LEV, cover it with a wet cloth
to prevent it from heating (120°C or more), then
braze the pipes so that the inside of pipes are not
oxidized.
LEV coil
(LEV B)
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
(TH33)
LEV coil
(LEV A)
Ball valve
Valve bed
128
Stop valve
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
10. Removing the high pressure switch (63H)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit and remove the right side panel.
(4) Pull out the lead wire of high pressure switch.
(5) Recover refrigerant.
(6) Remove the welded part of high pressure switch.
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by
removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the high pressure switch, cover it
with a wet cloth to prevent it from heating (100°C
or more), then braze the pipes so that the inside
of pipes are not oxidized.
11. Removing the reactor (DCL)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Disconnect the connecting wire from TAB DCL1/DCL2 on
the power circuit board.
(3) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit and remove the right side panel.
(4) Remove 4 reactor fixing screws (4 × 10) and remove the
reactor.
12. Removing the compressor (MC)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 2 front cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the front cover panel. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 4 back cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the back cover panel.
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(6) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) then remove the
valve bed.
(7) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
(8) Remove 3 separator fixing screws (4 × 10) and remove
the separator.
(9) Recover refrigerant.
(10) Remove the 3 points of the motor for compressor fixing
nut using a spanner or a adjustable wrench.
(11) Remove the welded pipe of motor for compressor inlet
and outlet then remove the compressor.
Photo 9 (PUHZ-RP140VKA)
Reactor
(DCL)
LEV coil (LEV C)
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
(TH33)
High pressure
switch (63H)
4-way valve
coil (21S4)
4-way valve
Photo 10
Valve
bed fixing
screws
Valve bed
Power
receiver
Separator
Compressor
(MC)
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Separator
fixing screw
Compressor
fixing nut
129
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
13. Removing the power receiver
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 2 front cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the front cover panel. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 4 back cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the back cover panel.
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(6) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) then remove the
valve bed.
(7) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
(8) Recover refrigerant.
(9) Remove 4 welded pipes of power receiver inlet and outlet.
(10) Remove 2 receiver leg fixing screws (4 × 10).
Photo 11
Inlet
Outlet
Power
receiver
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Receiver
leg
Compressor
(MC)
130
Receiver leg
fixing screws
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
PHOTOS & ILLUSTRATION
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. Removing the service panel and top panel
(1) Remove 3 service panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and slide
the hook on the right downward to remove the service
panel.
(2) Remove screws (3 for front, 3 for rear/5 × 10) of the top
panel and remove it.
Photo 1
Top panel fixing screws
Top panel
Service panel
Grille
fixing
screws
Slide
Grille
fixing
screws
Service panel
fixing screws
Cover panel
fixing screws
2. Removing the fan motor (MF1, MF2)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 4 fan grille fixing screws (5 × 10) to detach the
fan grille. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove a nut (for right handed screw of M6) to detach
the propeller. (See Photo 2.)
(5) Disconnect the connectors, CNF1, CNF2 on controller
circuit board in electrical parts box.
(6) Remove 4 fan motor fixing screws (5 × 20) to detach the
fan motor. (See Photo 3.)
Photo 2
Photo 3
Fan motor
fixing screws
Front panel
Fan motor
Propeller
Nut
Fan motor
fixing screws
3. Removing the electrical parts box
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the indoor/outdoor connecting wire from
terminal block.
(4) Disconnect the connector CNF1, CNF2, LEV-A and LEV-B,
LEV-C (RP140) on the controller circuit board.
<Symbols on the board>
• CNF1, CNF2 : Fan motor
• LEV-A, LEV-B, LEV-C : LEV
(5) Disconnect the pipe-side connections of the following parts.
• Thermistor <Outdoor pipe>(TH3) (TH33)
• Thermistor <Discharge>(TH4)
• Thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe, Outdoor>(TH7/6)
• High pressure switch (63H)
• 4-way valve coil (21S4)
• Thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
(6) Disconnect the lead wires from the reactors.
Photo 4
Electrical
parts box
Noise filter circuit
board (N.F.)
Controller
circuit
board (C.B.)
Terminal
block (TB1)
Terminal
block (TB2)
Valve bed
Compressor
(MC)
Reactors
Terminal cover
Continued to the next page.
131
From the previous page.
PHOTOS & ILLUSTRATION
OPERATING PROCEDURE
(7) Remove the terminal cover and disconnect the
compressor lead wire.
(8) Remove 2 electrical parts box fixing screws (4 × 10) and
detach the electrical parts box by pulling it upward. The
electrical parts box is fixed with 2 hooks on the left and 1
hook on the right.
Photo 5
Electrical parts box
Electrical parts
box fixing screw
4. Disassembling the electrical parts box
(1) Disconnect all the connectors on the controller circuit board.
(2) Remove the 3 screws, screw 1, 2 and 3, that fix the
Photo 6
plate equipped with the outdoor controller circuit board,
and the electrical parts box, screw 1 from the front and
the screw 2 and 3 from the bottom of the electrical parts
box. (See Photo 6 and 7.)
(3) Slide the plate in the direction of the arrow A and remove it.
(See Photo 6.)
(4) Remove the lead wires from the clamp on the bottom of the
electrical parts box. (See Photo 6.)
(5) Remove the 3 screws, screw 4 and 5, that fix the
bottom side of the electrical parts box and remove the
bottom side plate by sliding in the direction of the arrow B.
(See Photo 8 and 9.)
(6) Remove the 2 screws, screw 6 and 7, that fix the plate
equipped with the noise filter circuit board and converter
circuit board. (See Photo 10.)
Electrical
parts box
Screw1
Controller
circuit board
(C.B.)
A
Note: When reassembling the electrical parts box, make
sure the wirings are correct.
Photo 7
Bottom plate of
electrical parts
box
Clamp
Photo 8
Screw4
Screw5
Screw2
Screw3
Electrical parts
box
Heatsink
Photo 9
Noise filter
circuit board
(N.F.)
Bottom plate of electrical parts box
Photo 10
B
Converter
circuit board
(CONV.B.)
Electrical parts box
Screw6
Screw7
Power circuit
board (P.B.)
Noise filter circuit board (N.F.)
132
PHOTOS
OPERATING PROCEDURE
5. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the connector TH7/6 (red), on the
controller circuit board in the electrical parts box.
(4) Loosen the 2 wire clamps on top of the electrical parts box.
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
from the sensor holder.
Photo 11
Electrical parts box
Thermistor
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>(TH6)
Note: In case of replacing thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase
pipe> (TH6), replace it together with thermistor
<Outdoor> (TH7) since they are combined together.
Refer to No.6 below to remove thermistor <Outdoor>.
Clamp
6. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7)
Photo 12
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the connector TH7/6 (red) on the controller
circuit board in the electrical parts box.
(4) Loosen the 2 wire clamps on top of the electrical parts box.
(See Photo 11.)
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7) from the sensor
holder.
Note: In case of replacing thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7),
replace it together with thermistor <Outdoor 2phase pipe> (TH6), since they are combined together.
Refer to No.5 above to remove thermistor <Outdoor
2-phase pipe>.
Lead wire of thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7)
7. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3) (TH33)
Photo 13
and thermistor <Discharge> (TH4), thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Disconnect the connectors, TH3 (white) and TH4 (white),
TH33 (yellow), TH32 (black) on the controller circuit board
in the electrical parts box.
(3) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire under the electrical
parts box.
(4) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3), (TH33) and
thermistor <Discharge> (TH4) from the sensor holder.
(TH33: See Figure 1.)
[Removing the thermistor<Shell> (TH32)]
(5) Remove the sound proof cover (upper) for compressor.
(6) Pull out the thermistor <Shell> (TH32) from the holder of
the compressor shell.
Photo 14
Sound proof cover
Thermistor
<Shell> (TH32)
Thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3)
Thermistor
<Discharge>
(TH4)
Compressor
133
Sensor holder
PHOTOS
OPERATING PROCEDURE
Photo 15
8. Removing the 4-way valve coil (21S4), and LEV coil
(LEV(A), LEV(B)), (LEV(C): only for RP140)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
4-way valve
[Removing the 4-way valve coil]
(3) Remove 4-way valve coil fixing screw (M4 × 6).
(4) Remove the 4-way valve coil by sliding the coil toward you.
(5) Disconnect the connector 21S4 (green) on the controller
circuit board in the electrical parts box.
4-way valve
coil (21S4)
[Removing the LEV coil]
(3) Remove the LEV coil by sliding the coil upward.
(4) Disconnect the connectors, LEV A (white) and LEV B (red),
LEV C (blue) on the controller circuit board in the electrical
parts box.
9. Removing the 4-way valve
Figure 1 (PUHZ-RP100-125YKA)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
High pressure
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
switch (63H)
(3) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball
valve and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) then
remove the valve bed.
(4) Remove 4 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
Thermistor
(5) Remove the 4-way valve coil. (See Photo 15.)
<Outdoor pipe>
(6) Recover refrigerant.
(TH33)
(7) Remove the welded part of 4-way valve.
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by removLEV coil
ing the right side panel.
(LEV A)
Note 3: When installing the 4-way valve, cover it with a wet
cloth to prevent it from heating (120°C or more),
LEV coil
then braze the pipes so that the inside of pipes
(LEV B)
are not oxidized.
10. Removing LEV
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball
valve and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) then
remove the valve bed.
(4) Remove 4 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
Valve bed
(5) Remove the LEV coil.
(PUHZ-RP140YKA)
(6) Recover refrigerant.
(7) Remove the welded part of LEV.
High pressure
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air. switch (63H)
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the LEV, cover it with a wet cloth
to prevent it from heating (120°C or more), then
braze the pipes so that the inside of pipes are not
oxidized.
4-way valve
coil (21S4)
11. Removing the high pressure switch (63H)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit and remove the right side panel.
(4) Pull out the lead wire of high pressure switch.
(5) Recover refrigerant.
(6) Remove the welded part of high pressure switch.
Ball valve
Stop valve
LEV coil
(LEV C)
LEV coil
(LEV B)
Thermistor
<Outdoor pipe>
(TH33)
4-way valve
LEV coil
(LEV A)
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by
removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the high pressure switch, cover it
with a wet cloth to prevent it from heating (100°C
or more), then braze the pipes so that the inside
of pipes are not oxidized.
134
Ball valve
Valve bed
Stop valve
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
12. Removing the reactors (ACL1, ACL2, ACL3)
Photo 16
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the 4 fixing screws the reactor box. (2/front,
2/back of reactor).
(3) Disconnect the lead wires from the reactor. (See Photo 17)
(4) Remove each 4 fixing screws (2/front, 2/back of reactor) of
3 reactors.
Note 1: The reactor is very heavy (4 kg) !
Be careful when handling it.
Note 2: The reactor box is also removable.
Photo 17
Reactors
Reactors
Lead wires of reactors
Figure 2
Reactor box fixing screw (front)
Reactors
Reactor fixing screws (front)
Reactor box fixing screw (front)
135
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
13. Removing the compressor (MC)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 2 front cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the front cover panel. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 4 back cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the back cover panel.
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(6) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) and then remove the
valve bed.
(7) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit and then remove the right side panel.
(8) Remove 3 separator fixing screws (4 × 10) and remove
the separator.
(9) Recover refrigerant.
(10) Remove the 3 points of the compressor fixing
nut using a spanner or a adjustable wrench.
(11) Remove the welded pipe of compressor inlet
and outlet and then remove the compressor.
Photo 18
Valve
bed fixing
screws
Valve bed
Power
receiver
Separator
Compressor
(MC)
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Separator
fixing screw
Compressor
fixing nut
14. Removing the power receiver
Photo 19
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 2 front cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the front cover panel. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 4 back cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the back cover panel.
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(6) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) and then remove the
valve bed.
(7) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit and then remove the right side panel.
(8) Recover refrigerant.
(9) Remove 4 welded pipes of power receiver inlet and outlet.
(10) Remove 2 receiver leg fixing screws (4 × 10).
Inlet
Outlet
Power
receiver
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Receiver
leg
Compressor
(MC)
136
Receiver leg
fixing screws
PUHZ-RP200YKA PUHZ-RP250YKA
PHOTOS & ILLUSTRATION
OPERATING PROCEDURE
1. Removing the service panel and top panel
(1) Remove 3 service panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and slide
the hook on the right downward to remove the service
panel.
(2) Remove screws (3 for front, 3 for rear/5 × 10) of the top
panel and remove it.
Photo 1
Top panel
Top panel fixing screws
Service panel
Grille
fixing
screws
Slide
Grille
fixing
screws
Service panel
fixing screws
Cover panel
fixing screws
2. Removing the fan motor (MF1, MF2)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 4 fan grille fixing screws (5 × 10) to detach the
fan grille. (See Photo 1.)
(4) Remove a nut (for right handed screw of M6) to detach
the propeller. (See Photo 2.)
(5) Disconnect the connectors, CNF1, CNF2 on controller
circuit board in electrical parts box.
(6) Remove 4 fan motor fixing screws (5 × 20) to detach the
fan motor. (See Photo 3.)
Photo 2
Photo 3
Front panel
Fan motor
fixing screws
Fan motor
Propeller
Nut
Fan motor
fixing screws
3. Removing the electrical parts box
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the indoor/outdoor connecting wire and power
supply wire from terminal block.
(4) Disconnect the connectors on the controller circuit board.
(5) Remove the terminal cover and disconnect the
compressor lead wire.
(6) Remove 2 electrical parts box fixing screws (4 × 10) and
detach the electrical parts box by pulling it upward. The
electrical parts box is fixed with 2 hooks on the left and 1
hook on the right.
Photo 4
Controller circuit
board (C.B.)
Electrical parts box
Electrical parts box
fixing screws
Noise filter
circuit
board (N.F.)
Terminal
block (TB1)
137
Terminal
block (TB2)
PHOTOS
OPERATING PROCEDURE
4. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the connectors, TH6 and TH7 (red), on the
controller circuit board in the electrical parts box.
(4) Loosen the 2 wire clamps on top of the electrical parts box.
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase pipe> (TH6)
from the sensor holder.
Photo 5
Thermistor
<Outdoor 2-phase pipe>(TH6)
Electrical
parts box
Note: In case of replacing thermistor <Outdoor 2-phase
pipe> (TH6), replace it together with thermistor
<Outdoor> (TH7) since they are combined together.
Refer to No.6 below to remove thermistor <Outdoor>.
Clamp
5. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Disconnect the connector TH7 (red) on the controller circuit
board in the electrical parts box.
(4) Loosen the 2 wire clamps on top of the electrical parts box.
(See Photo 4.)
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7) from the sensor
holder.
Photo 6
Note: In case of replacing thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7),
replace it together with thermistor <Outdoor 2phase pipe> (TH6), since they are combined together.
Refer to No.5 above to remove thermistor <Outdoor
2-phase pipe>.
6. Removing the thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3), thermistor <Discharge> (TH4) and thermistor <Shell> (TH32)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Disconnect the connectors, TH3 (white) and TH4 (white)
on the controller circuit board in the electrical parts box.
(3) Loosen the clamp for the lead wire in the rear of the electrical parts box.
[Removing the thermistor<Outdoor pipe>(TH3)]
(4) Pull out the thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3) from the
sensor holder.
[Removing the thermistor<Shell>(TH32)]
(4) Remove the soundproof cover (upper) for compressor.
(5) Pull out the thermistor <Shell> (TH32) from the thermoholder of the compressor shell.
Lead wire of thermistor <Outdoor> (TH7)
Photo 7
Thermistor <Outdoor pipe> (TH3)
Thermistor
<Discharge>
(TH4)
Soundproof
cover (upper)
for compressor
[Removing the thermistor<Discharge>(TH4)]
(4) Pull out the thermistor <Discharge> (TH4) from the sensor holder.
Photo 8
Sound proof cover
(side) for compressor
Sensor holder
Compressor
(MC)
Thermistor
<Shell> (TH32)
138
PHOTOS
OPERATING PROCEDURE
7. Removing the 4-way valve coil (21S4) and linear expansion valve coil (LEV-A, LEV-B)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
Figure 1
Linear expansion valve
4-way valve
[Removing the 4-way valve coil]
(4) Remove 4-way valve coil fixing screw (M4 × 6).
(5) Remove the 4-way valve coil by sliding the coil toward you.
Linear
expansion
valve coil
(LEV-A)
[Removing the linear expansion valve coil]
(4) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
(5) Remove the linear expansion valve coil by sliding the coil
upward.
Linear expansion
valve coil (LEV-B)
4-way
valve coil (21S4)
8. Removing the 4-way valve
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(4) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10), 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) then remove the
valve bed.
(5) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
(6) Remove the 4-way valve coil.
(7) Recover refrigerant.
(8) Remove the welded part of 4-way valve.
9. Removing the linear expansion valve
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10), 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) then remove the
valve bed.
(4) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit then remove the right side panel.
(5) Remove the linear expansion valve coil.
(6) Recover refrigerant.
(7) Remove the welded part of linear expansion valve.
139
4-way valve coil fixing screw
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in
the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by
removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the parts of refrigerant circuit, cover it with a wet cloth to prevent it
from heating (120°C or more), then braze
the pipes so that the inside of pipes are
not oxidized.
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
10. Removing the high pressure switch (63H) (63H1) (63H2)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit and remove the right side panel.
(4) Pull out the lead wire of high pressure switch.
(5) Recover refrigerant.
(6) Remove the welded part of high pressure switch.
Photo 9 (PUHZ-RP200YKA)
63H (For RP200)
63H1, 63H2 (For RP250)
Note 1: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in
the air.
Note 2: The welded part can be removed easily by
removing the right side panel.
Note 3: When installing the parts of refrigerant circuit, cover it with a wet cloth to prevent it
from heating (100°C or more), then braze
the pipes so that the inside of pipes are
not oxidized.
High pressure switch
(PUHZ-RP250YKA)
High pressure
switch (63H1)
11. Removing the compressor (MC)
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 2 front cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the front cover panel.
(4) Remove 4 back cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the back cover panel.
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(6) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10), 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16), then remove the
valve bed.
(7) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit and remove the right side panel.
(8) Remove 3 separator fixing screws (4 × 10) and remove
the separator.
(9) Remove the soundproof cover for compressor.
(10) Remove the terminal cover and remove the compressor
lead wire.
(11) Recover refrigerant.
(12) Remove the 3 points of the compressor fixing nut using
a spanner or a adjustable wrench.
(13) Remove the welded pipe of compressor inlet and outlet
and remove the compressor.
High pressure
switch (63H2)
Photo 10
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
140
Compressor
terminal
Compressor
(MC)
Soundproof
cover
Compressor
fixing nut
OPERATING PROCEDURE
PHOTOS
12. Removing the power receiver
(1) Remove the service panel. (See Photo 1.)
(2) Remove the top panel. (See Photo 1.)
(3) Remove 2 front cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the front cover panel.
(4) Remove 4 back cover panel fixing screws (5 × 10) and
remove the back cover panel.
(5) Remove the electrical parts box. (See Photo 4.)
(6) Remove 3 valve bed fixing screws (4 × 10) and 4 ball valve
and stop valve fixing screws (5 × 16) and then remove the
valve bed.
(7) Remove 3 right side panel fixing screws (5 × 10) in the
rear of the unit and then remove the right side panel.
(8) Recover refrigerant.
(9) Remove 4 welded pipes of power receiver inlet and outlet.
(10) Remove 2 receiver leg fixing screws (4 × 10).
Photo 11
Note: Recover refrigerant without spreading it in the air.
Separator
Power receiver
Valve bed
fixing screw
Valve bed
Valve bed
fixing screws
Compressor
Separator fixing
screw
Compressor fixing nuts
Power receiver
leg fixing screws
Photo 12
Inlet pipe
Outlet pipe
Power receiver
141
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
CCopyright 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
Distributed in May 2009 No.OCH451 PDF 7
Made in Japan
New publication, effective May 2009
Specifications subject to change without notice